JP6529995B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines that have two operation means such as effect buttons that can be operated by a player. In this gaming machine, an operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the one operation means is executed. When the operation prompting display is executed, even if the player operates the other operation means, the operation of the other operation means is determined to be valid, and one of the one is operated according to the operation of the other operation means. The same effect as the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-5651, A

  According to the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the same effect is executed regardless of which operation means is operated, regardless of the mode of the operation promotion display. Therefore, the operation in which the player is prompted to operate by the operation promotion display In some cases, the operating means different from the means may be operated. For this reason, it is not possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation of the operation means whose operation is prompted by the operation promotion display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by operation.

(1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
First detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, decision key for setting);
Before Stories second detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the different player of the operation of the first detecting means detectable player (e.g., an operation portion other than the push button 120 the first detecting means if the push button 120 )When,
In the first aspect (for example, an aspect in which the button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38 (B) or the like) or in the second aspect (for example, an aspect that urges the player more strongly than the first aspect) A promotion display (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, effect display device 9, step S8125 in FIG. 34) for prompting the player to perform an operation detectable by the first detection means in a mode in which a button as shown is popped out. Step S8139A) of FIG. 35 and an effective period display in which an effective period in which at least one of the first detection means and the second detection means can detect an operation is displayed by changing a display mode (for example, meter display etc.) (For example, effective period display 88 etc. CPU 120 for production control which performs operation production etc.) and the display control means which can display.
Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the first detection means or the second detection means detects an operation based on execution of the promotion display (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control, effect And a display 9),
The effect executing means is
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the first aspect, detection of the second detection means with respect to the first aspect is regarded as valid determination (for example, the steps of FIG. 31 (B) and FIG. 34) As shown in S8128 and FIG. 38 (F), effects of the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif notification effect image may be executed, or effects of the same character but different in movement are performed. Or, a presentation of the same kind of presentation mode may be performed, such as an indication showing that the character is talking a line with the same meaning, or an indication of the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of the big hit expectation. And one may perform a related rendering such as performing a premium rendering for one of the operations and performing a non-premium rendering associated with the other operation).
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the second aspect, the detection of the second detection means for the second aspect is not regarded as an effective determination (e.g., for the operation of the second operation means, (1) The same effect as the effect for the operation of the operation means may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D), the operation concerned You may perform the effect which announces that it is invalid.)
The display control means
It is capable of displaying a second promotion display with enlarged or to shrink the first promotion display and the first promotion displayed as the accelerator display (for example, from the first accelerator display is capable of displaying a second accelerator display ),
A first pattern for variably displaying a first display of a size corresponding to the first promotion display as the first promotion display and performing the second promotion display as the effective period display and the second effective display It is possible to execute a second pattern that variably displays the second display of the size corresponding to the second promotion display (for example, the effective period display of the size corresponding to the first promotion display and the second promotion Display the effective period of the size corresponding to the display etc.),
By making the change mode of the first display and the second display different, the same effective period is displayed for the first pattern and the second pattern (for example, the size of the meter as the effective period display is enlarged) While increasing the amount of decrease in the meter to display a certain effective period, etc.)
The display control means executes the promotion display such that the rate at which an advantageous state for the player is controlled when executed is controlled to be higher in the second mode than in the first mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.
Moreover, the said promotion display may be in the visual recognition difficult state in which at least one part is concealed by the movable member effect in which a movable member operate | moves,
The display period of the prompting display ends later than the period in which the prompting display is in the difficult-to-view state.

  The "first operation means" and the "second operation means" described in the means (1-1) may be collectively referred to as "operation means" in this specification.

(1-2) In the gaming machine of (1-1) above,
The operation promotion display means executes the operation promotion display so that the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the mode of the operation promoting display of the button cut-in notice effect is executed rather than when the mode of the operation promoting display of the button serif preview effect is performed. The rate at which the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher.

  According to such a configuration, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the operation prompting display of the second aspect is executed than in the first aspect. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation promotion display, and the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(1-3) In the gaming machine of (1-1) or (1-2) above,
The first operation means can be changed from the normal mode to the specific mode (for example, the shape, the pattern, the color, or the like can be changed such that the push button 120 pops out),
When the first operation means is in the specific mode, the effect execution means does not determine the operation of the second operation means as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, the operation of the second operation means The same effect as the effect for the operation may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and the operation is invalid as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). You may perform the production | presentation which notifies that.).

  According to such a configuration, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is not executed even when the second operation means is operated. Therefore, the operation of the first operation means can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-3) above,
An instruction display means capable of displaying an explanation to the effect that the operation of the second operation means is determined to be effective when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8125, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  According to such a configuration, the player is easily informed that the determination is made effective even when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from wondering which operation means to operate.

(1-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-4) above,
The information processing apparatus further includes indication display means capable of displaying an indication that the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8139A and FIG. 39 (B), it displays that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is not determined as an effective determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second operating means in anticipation that the same effect as when the first operating means is operated is performed without the player being aware.

(1-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-5) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, etc.);
A movable member (for example, a gift 200) which performs a predetermined operation;
Detection valid period display means for displaying a detection valid period display (for example, a remaining valid period image (remaining valid period image 202 shown in FIG. 38B)) indicating that the detection by the detection means is a valid detection valid period (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S8126, S8140, S8168)
The detection valid period display is a invisible condition in which at least a portion is concealed by the operation of the movable member (for example, a state in which the remaining valid period image 202 shown in FIG. May be))
The detection valid period ends later than the period in which the detection valid period display is in the difficult-to-see state (for example, as shown in FIG. 30B), after the character returns from the rendering position to the initial position, That is, the detection valid period ends after the visual difficulty state of the remaining valid period image is eliminated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the movable member operable and to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period.

(1-7) In the gaming machine of (1-6) above,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine that performs variable display,
The effect executing means is
While the variable display can be performed production,
Detection effect executing means (for example, micro for effect control) which executes detection effect (for example, button speech notification effect, button cut in notification effect, lever notification effect) based on detection of the player's action by the detection means Computer 100, steps S8120 to S8175),
Movable member effect executing means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control, steps S8106 to S8114) for executing movable member effect (for example, character announcement effect effect) for operating the movable member;
The detection effect and the movable member effect can be performed at the same time in a period before the variable display reaches the reach state (for example, as shown in FIG. 30A, in the period before the reach state) , Button serif announcement production and feature announcement announcement production can be performed at the same time).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to important effects, and it is possible to effectively perform effects.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) above,
The detection effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of detection effects (for example, button speech notification effect, button cut in notification effect, lever notification effect) having different degrees of expectation.
The effect execution means does not simultaneously execute the detection effect and the movable member effect of which the expectation is higher than the predetermined degree (for example, a button cut-in notification effect whose expectation (importance) is higher than that of the button speech notification effect and The lever preview effect and the feature preview effect are not performed at the same time (see FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect with high expectation from being overlooked.

(1-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-6) to (1-8),
A plurality of detection means (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, etc.) capable of detecting different player's actions,
The said detection effect execution means is based on the fact that a specific detection means (for example, the stick controller 122) of the plurality of detection means has detected the action of the player, a specific detection effect (for example, a lever advance notice effect) Is viable and
The effect execution means does not execute the specific detection effect and the movable member effect at the same time (for example, the lever advance effect and the feature advance effect are not performed at the same time. See FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, by providing the specific detection effect that is not executed simultaneously with the movable member effect, the effect can be made easy to understand.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means (2-1)-(2-6) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Some conventional gaming machines include an operation means for performing an operation by a player and perform operation promotion display for prompting an operation on the operation means. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-188111 discloses a gaming machine which displays an operation promotion display and an effective period in which an operation by the operation means can be received.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the effective period is not displayed depending on the mode of the operation promotion display, and display control of the effective period according to the operation promotion display can not be accurately performed. Therefore, the configuration is as follows.

(2-1) A gaming machine provided with operation means (for example, a push button 120 etc.),
By displaying operation prompting (for example, button display 66 etc.) for promoting the operation by the operation means and quantitative display (for example meter display etc.) changeably, the effective period in which the operation for the operation means can be received is displayed Display control means (for example, CPU 101 for effect control for executing operation effects etc.) for performing the effective period display (for example, effective period display 88 etc.) to be displayed by the display means,
The display control means
As the operation prompting display, it is possible to display the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting that is an enlargement or reduction of the first operation prompting display (for example, it is possible to display the first prompting to the second prompting) ),
A first pattern for variably displaying a first quantitative display of a size corresponding to the first operation prompting as the effective period display while performing the first operation prompting, and the second operation prompting And a second pattern for variably displaying a second quantitative display of a size corresponding to the second operation prompting as the effective period display (for example, a size corresponding to the first prompting) Display the effective period of the display and the effective period of the size corresponding to the second prompting etc.
The same effective period is displayed for the first pattern and the second pattern by changing the change mode of the first quantitative display and the second quantitative display (for example, the size of the meter as the effective period display) Increase the reduction amount of the meter while displaying a certain effective period, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, display control of the effective period according to the operation prompting display can be accurately performed.

(2-2) In the gaming machine of (2-1) above,
The display control means moves the operation promotion display and the effective period display from the back side to the front side as the display on the display means, and can display the movement display means (for example, for the player of the image display device 9) The effect control CPU 101 and the like are displayed such that the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 themselves approach from the rear side to the front side.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform display control of the effective period display according to the operation prompting display.

(2-3) In the gaming machine of (2-1) or (2-2) above,
The display control means can change from the first pattern to the second pattern for displaying a second operation prompting display obtained by enlarging the first operation prompting display within the same effective period (for example, immediately after the start of the operation effect) The first prompting display and the first quantitative display are displayed on the screen, and then each is enlarged and displayed in a mode such as the second prompting display and the second quantitative display).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the operation prompting display and the effective period display.

(2-4) In the game machine according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-3),
The display control means moves the operation promotion display and the effective period display from the back side to the front side as the display on the display means, and can display the movement display means (for example, for the player of the image display device 9) The CPU 101 for effect control, which displays the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 itself from the back side to the front side,
The movement display means is configured to move a second operation prompting display in which the first operation prompting display is enlarged from the first pattern within the same effective period by moving from the back side to the front side as the display on the display means. While being able to change to the second pattern to be displayed, the movement from the back side to the front side is stopped as display on the display means based on the change to the second pattern (first promotion display and first The quantitative display is displayed, and then each is enlarged to an aspect such as a second promotion display and a second quantitative display, and the operation effect is ended, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the operation prompting display and the effective period display.

(2-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-4),
The display control means displays a variable gauge as the quantitative display (for example, displays a meter), and corresponds to a change rate of a gauge corresponding to the second quantitative display to the first quantitative display The same effective period is displayed for the first pattern and the second pattern by making the rate of change of the gauge faster than the rate of change (for example, by increasing the rate of decrease according to the increase in the size of the meter). Display a certain validity period, etc.)

  According to such a configuration, display control of the effective period according to the operation prompting display can be accurately performed.

(2-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-5),
It further comprises a movable member (for example, the character 200 etc.) that performs a predetermined operation,
The valid period display may be in a difficult-to-see state in which at least a part is hidden by the operation of the movable member (for example, the button display 66 and the valid by moving the character 200 from the initial position Period display 88 becomes invisible, etc.),
The display control means changes the quantitative display to end the effective period display after the period in which the visual recognition is difficult (for example, after the character 200 returns from the rendering position to the initial position, ie, the effective period The effective period ends, for example, after the invisibility state disappears).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the movable member operable and to prevent the player from overlooking the validity period.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in 1st Embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the configuration of a pending specific area and a pending storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol of a production symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of a character thing notice production, a button serif notice production, a button cut in notice production, and a lever notice production. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing an example of an execution determination table of a bonus announcement presentation effect, a button speech announcement presentation effect, a button cut-in announcement presentation effect, and a lever announcement presentation effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a character thing preliminary | backup production | presentation, and button serif preliminary production | generation. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of button cut-in notice effect. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure reservation memory | storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation production execution determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation in, when the operation presentation of the pattern A is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation in, when the operation presentation in a modification is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation promotion display and effective period display in a modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame (also referred to as a "game machine frame") 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit (also referred to as a "controller sensor unit") 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. . Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like.

  In addition, the push button 120 incorporates a button jumping actuator 128 (see FIG. 3) for jumping the push button 120. A mode in which the push button 120 is deformed or popped out from the normal mode by about several centimeters in the direction opposite to the pressing direction by the button jumping actuator 128 (see FIG. 39B) And so on. The button pop-out actuator 128 may be anything as long as the aspect of the push button 120 can be changed. For example, it may be a motor such as a servomotor or a solenoid. It may be a power cylinder such as a pneumatic cylinder or an electric cylinder.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device (also referred to as an "image display device") 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the microcomputer for effect control is executing variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display (also referred to as "first special symbol display device") 8a, the effect display along with the variable display When effect display is performed by the device 9 and variable display of the second special symbol is performed by the second special symbol display (also referred to as "second special symbol display device") 8b, along with the variable display. Since the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  In addition, when the gaming machine is configured to provide the movable member in the game area, the fourth symbol is displayed in the area where the visual recognition is not hindered even if the movable member is at any position in the game area. It should be configured to

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while in the case of a big hit it is displayed in red.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). The second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol is also similar to the first.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening ("normal winning ball device" After passing (including winning) the second start winning opening (also referred to as "usually variable winning ball device") 14 or the start condition of variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0) And variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and it is started based on the state that the big hit game is not being executed, and the variable display time ( When the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  In the center of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a star shape configured to be movable downward (on the screen of the effect display device 9, that is, in front of the screen of the effect display device 9 as viewed from the player) The character 200 is provided. This accessory 200 takes the center of the upper part of the effect display device 9 as the initial position (see FIG. 38A), and can move to the effect position overlapping a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (FIG. See D). The accessory 200 may be provided with a light emitter such as an LED.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold storage indicator ("4 special symbols to display the number of activated winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number (" A second hold indicator) 18b is also provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the same as the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the first hold storage number (hold storage is also referred to as start storage or start winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator (also referred to as a "first hold indicator") 18a for displaying the symbol is provided.

  Further, an area (total holding storage display unit) for displaying the total number (total holding storage number) which is the total of the first holding storage number and the second holding storage number, at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9 Also referred to as a "start prize storage display area" 18c is provided. In this embodiment, by providing the combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . Note that instead of the total pending storage number display unit 18c, a first pending storage display unit for displaying the first pending storage number and a second pending storage display unit for displaying the second pending storage number are provided. May be

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate (also referred to as "pass gate") 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator (also referred to as a "general drawing reserve display") 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. ing. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED (also referred to as a "game effect lamp") 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value. The same applies to the second.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Also referred to as “I / O” 57). In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  In addition, the input driver circuit (also referred to as a "switch circuit") 58 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer It is mounted on the substrate 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning prize ball device 15, and the output circuit which drives the solenoid 21 which opens and closes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which forms the big prize mouth according to the command from the game control microcomputer 560 The main board 31 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board (also referred to as "lamp control board") 35, and Control of the sound output from the speaker 27 is performed via an output board (also referred to as “voice control board”) 70.

  In the effect control means, as described later, the push sensor 124 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, the button jumping actuator 128, and the push sensor 120 are provided. Are also connected (see FIG. 3), but are not shown in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) (also referred to as a “display control unit”) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 operates the accessory 200 by outputting a drive signal to the accessory motor 127 via the output port 105.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the drive signal to the button jumping actuator 128 via the output port 105, thereby changing the push button 120 from the normal mode or jumping out. And return to the normal mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start hole switch 13a, the second start hole switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro board mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is a hit where the gaming state does not change when the small hit game is over. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening of the 0.1 second twice), or the opening time of the big winning opening Is a very short jackpot, and a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (ie, by doing so, as if it had suddenly become a definite change state to the player It is something to show). That is, in this embodiment, the small hit is the same as the open pattern of the big hit and the big winning opening suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as non-reach pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is non-reach The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, normal PA 2-3 to normal PA 2-4, normal PB 2-3 to normal The variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are prepared. There is. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability variation hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns which are used when there is not a sudden positive big hit and which is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, in the case of using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of a sudden definite big hit and which is accompanied by a pseudo rendition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5).

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later) See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration display.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a second start prize. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first starting winning a prize designation command and the second starting winning a prize designation command may be generically referred to as a starting winning a prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for specifying a total number (total pending storage number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (sum total storage number subtraction designation command) for designating 1 subtraction of the total number of suspension storage numbers.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in response to the variation of the first special symbol. It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 11 and 12 are flow charts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 22), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed every round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also the processing to start the big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A). In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the order of winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on in the storage-prefer specific information storage area (pending specific area) When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 14A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending storage buffer) for saving a random number and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 14B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216A), and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217A).

  The second start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 13B is similar to the first start port switch passing process of FIG. 13A, and therefore the description will not be repeated.

  FIG.15 and FIG.16 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the fluctuation display was finally stopped if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been sent yet. It confirms (step S51A). In addition, whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the last stop of the fluctuation display, for example, when the fluctuation display is ended (for example, in a special symbol stop process described later), a predetermined timer is set, and in step S51A This can be determined by confirming whether or not this predetermined timer has timed out. Finally, if the predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation display was stopped, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demo specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the processing. . For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, step S51A is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag is set. , S51B may be controlled not to be executed. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 14A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S53). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In this case, for example, when shifting to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second hold storage tends to be accumulated. The variation display of the special symbol may be executed with priority.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. The second is the same as the first. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, micro control for effect control in the order of background specification command, fluctuation pattern command, display result specification command, total suspension storage number subtraction specification command for each timer interrupt It will be sent to the computer 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A total pending storage number subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the jackpot determination extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type judgment table according to the jackpot type as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. (Step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S94). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination for normal time as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type as any one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern for loss at the time of shortening The type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (see steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine any one of a plurality of types, the time-outout variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table for losing upon reduction Is selected. In addition, when the game state is a definite change state or a short time state, a time variation check pattern selection table for off time is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and if the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, it is shown that the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state is different from the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories. However, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. A pattern determination table is selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 9) according to any one of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit and removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the combined holding memory number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Note that whether or not the total storage reserve number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted, for example, that the total storage retention number subtraction specification command has been sent when transmitting the total storage storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set may be checked in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set combined holding memory number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset in the special symbol stop processing and the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. do it.

  Next, if the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected and the display control of the effect display device 9 (including the display control of the effect design) Run.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit start designated commands (big hit start designated command, small hit / suddenly probability variation big hit start designated command) (step S621), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit start designated command. A corresponding flag is set (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is received, the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, and the small hit / sudden oddity big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) If it is received, the small hit / sudden definite big hit start specification command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit end specified commands (big hit end specified command, small hit / suddenly definite variation big hit end specified command) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit end specified command. The corresponding big hit end designated command reception flag is set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S 628). For example, if the received effect control command is the first start winning specified command, the first start winning specified command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second start winning specified command, the second start winning specified command Set the reception flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the fluctuation pattern command reception flag (step S812), and the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect pattern fluctuation start process (step S801). The value is updated (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted also at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). That is, the processing of step S8001 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. In addition, it may be made to provide the false ream only symbol used only as a temporary stop symbol of a false gangmate instead of or in addition to a chance eye pattern as a temporary pause design of a false gangmate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 29, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols is determined by the even symbols (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”) having the same three symbols. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the rendering symbols aligned with the same odd symbols ("1", "3", "5" or "7").

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol.

  Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the bonus character announcement effect (step S8003a). Then, when it is determined that the feature preview effect is to be executed (Y in step S8003b), the CPU 101 for effect control has a flag feature standby effect flag indicating that it is determined to execute the feature preview effect. The setting is made (step S8003c).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button speech notification effect, and the effect mode in the case of execution (step S8004a). Then, when it is determined that the button serif notice effect is to be executed (Y in step S8004b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button serif notice effect, and executes the button serif notice effect. In step S8004c, a button serif notification effect waiting flag indicating that the button is determined is set.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a button cut-in notification effect, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8005a). Then, when it is determined to execute the button cut-in notification effect (Y in step S8005 b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button cut-in notification effect, and the button cut-in notification effect The button cut-in notice effect standby flag is set to indicate that it is decided to execute (step S8005 c).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a lever advance effect, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8006a). Then, when it is determined to execute the lever advance effect (Y in step S8006b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the lever advance effect determined, and determines to execute the lever advance effect. In step S8006c, a lever preview effect waiting flag indicating that the game is being performed is set. Then, it transfers to step S8008.

  The prize preview effect is an effect in which control is performed to temporarily move the prize 200 from the initial position to the effect position. In addition, the button serif announcement effect and the button cut-in announcement effect are accompanied by an operation prompting prompting the operation of the push button 120, and are effects executed based on the operation of the push button 120 during the detection effective period. is there. In the button serif announcement effect and the button cut-in announcement effect, when the corresponding detection effective period starts, the effect display device 9 performs operation promotion notification for urging the push button 120 (for example, An operation prompting image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 and a remaining effective period image showing the remaining period of the detection effective period are displayed (see FIGS. 38B to 38E). Then, based on the fact that the operation of the push button 120 has been detected at least once during the detection effective period, a button speech notification effect image or a button cut in notification effect image (for example, an image in which the character says a predetermined serif, or a predetermined The image showing the possibility of becoming a big hit, such as an image in which the message of is shown, is displayed.

  The lever advance presentation effect is an effect that is executed based on the operation of the stick controller 122 being performed during the detection effective period, with an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the stick controller 122. In the lever preview effect, at the timing when the corresponding detection effective period starts, in the effect display device 9, an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed (for example, the appearance of the stick controller 122 is simulated) The operation prompting image and the remaining effective period image indicating the remaining period of the detection effective period are displayed. Then, based on the fact that the operation of the stick controller 122 has been detected at least once during the detection effective period, a lever advance notice effect image (for example, an image showing whether or not a big hit) is displayed. In the present embodiment, "promotion" is used not to mean that the player's operation is advanced, but to mean that the player's operation is prompted (solicited).

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing an example of execution timings of a bonus announcement production, a button speech announcement production, a button cut-in announcement production and a lever announcement production. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the feature announcement notice and the button speech notice announcement are executed before the variable display reaches the reach state. In addition, the button cut-in notice effect and the lever notice effect are executed after reaching the reach state. The lever advance notice effect is executed later than the button cut-in notice effect. Specifically, it is executed immediately before fluctuating stop (that is, immediately before the leading off symbol or the big hit symbol is derived and displayed).

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30A, the feature announcement notice and the button speech announcement notice are performed at the same time. Then, by executing the feature previewing effect and the button speech previewing effect at the same time, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image displayed by the button speech previewing effect are moved to the rendering position by the character previewing effect. The object 200 is covered by the object 200 and difficult to be recognized, and the player may miss the detection effective period (i.e., the button speech notification effect). Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection effective period of the button serif announcement effect is ended after completion of the feature announcement effect, that is, after the state in which the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are difficult to be viewed is resolved. Is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), after the character 200 moved to the effect position by the start of the character preview effect is returned to the initial position by the completion of the character preview effect. The detection period of the button speech preview effect is configured to end. By configuring in this manner, even if the feature preview effect and the button speech preview effect are executed at the same time, and the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are covered by the feature 200 and it becomes temporarily difficult to view, Since the state which is difficult to visually recognize during the detection effective period is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the button speech preview effect is started and the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are displayed, and then the character preview effect is started after a predetermined period, and the character 200 is at the effect position. By being configured to be moved to, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image can be viewed without being covered by the accessory 200 after being displayed at least, for a predetermined period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect) even when the character item announcement effect and the button speech notification effect are executed at the same time. Can.

  In this embodiment, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are a predetermined period before the start of the bonus preview effect by making the start timing and the end timing of the bonus preview effect and the button speech preview effect different from each other. And, it is configured to be visible without being covered by the prize 200 for a predetermined period after the end, but at least either the predetermined period before the start of the feature preview effect or the predetermined period after the end can be viewed It may be provided as a period. That is, the button speech preview effect and the feature preview production are simultaneously started, and the character preview production may end earlier, and the button speech preview effect may end after the predetermined period has elapsed, or the button speech preview may be performed first. The presentation may be started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the announcement notice presentation may be started, and the button speech announcement announcement and the announcement notice presentation may be ended simultaneously.

  Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the bonus item announcement effect and the button speech announcement effect at the same time, but the execution periods may be completely matched and executed, or one of the execution periods may be executed. It may be executed so that the parts overlap. However, even when the execution period is completely matched, it is desirable to provide a period in which the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are not difficult to view within the detection effective period. For example, an operation mode (for example, movement start timing or movement speed to movement position, movement route, stop period at presentation position, movement start timing or movement speed to movement to initial position, movement path) This can be realized by adjusting the display mode (for example, display size or display position) of the remaining effective period image. Specifically, the movement to the effect position is started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the bonus item presentation effect (the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image can be viewed for a predetermined period of time from the start) The movement from the effect position to the initial position may be started before the predetermined period when the feature preview effect ends (the operation promotion image or the entire area of the remaining effective period image may be hidden by the bonus 200) The area to be reduced gradually decreases, and a visible period is secured).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image by the button serif announcement effect are configured so as not to be completely obscured even if the character 200 moves to the effect position (FIG. 38 (FIG. See D). That is, although the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image by the button serif announcement effect may be covered by the character 200 moved to the effect position by the character announcement effect and may be difficult to visually recognize, it may not be completely visible. Instead, it is always configured to be partially visible. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection valid period (that is, the button speech notification effect) even if the character announcement notification effect and the button speech notification effect are executed at the same time. Can.

  Also, in general, the effects performed after reaching the reach state are more important than the effects performed before the reach state. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the feature previewing which may make it difficult to visually recognize the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image is executed only before reaching the reach state. Is configured as. By configuring in this manner, the feature preview effect and the effect of high importance (for example, the effect to be executed after reaching the reach such as button cut-in advance effect or lever advance effect) are executed at the same time, and the player It is possible to avoid the situation where the attention of people is dispersed.

  Note that the timings of executing the bonus announcement production, the button speech announcement production, the button cut-in announcement production and the lever announcement production are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 30, but may be any timing during fluctuation. Further, the timing to execute these effects may be any timing during the big hit game. In addition, when performing these effects during the big hit game, it is suggested that it is controlled to a definite change state or time saving state after an increase in the number of rounds or the big hit game based on the detection of the predetermined operation. It is also good.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a prize announcement presentation execution judgment table, a button speech announcement presentation execution judgment table, a button cut-in announcement presentation execution judgment table and a lever announcement presentation execution judgment table.

  In step S8003a, it is determined whether or not to execute a bonus character preview effect using the bonus product effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A).

  31 (A), determination values corresponding to the determined items ("No execution" and "execution") are assigned to each variation pattern, but FIG. In the example shown in A), in order to simplify the explanation, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for setting the bonus character announcement effect, and determines it as the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), the numerical values corresponding to the determination items ("No execution" and "with execution") in each variation pattern indicate the percentage (%) at which each determination item is selected. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the case of the variation pattern of shortening variation and deviation (for example, in the case of non-reach PA1-2 shown in FIG. 6), the feature previewing is not performed at a rate of 95%. It is determined that a feature preview effect will be performed at a rate of 5%. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (for example, in the case of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 and normal PB2-2 shown in FIG. It is decided not to carry out, and it is decided to carry out the feature preview effect at a rate of 25%. Also, in the case of the fluctuation pattern per normal reach (for example, in the case of normal PA2-3, normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 and normal PB2-4 shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute and it is decided to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 50%. Moreover, in the case of the variation pattern of the super reach loss (for example, in the case of the super PA 3-1, the normal PA 3-2, the normal PB 3-1 and the normal PB 3-2 shown in FIG. It is determined not to execute the effect, and it is determined to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 70%. Also, in the case of the fluctuation pattern per super reach (for example, in the case of normal PA3-3, normal PA3-4, normal PB3-3 and normal PB3-4 shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 85%.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the item preview effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A), the button serif preview effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (B), and the button cut shown in FIG. 31 (C) Although the judgment values are actually assigned to the in advance notice effect execution judgment table and the lever advance notice effect execution judgment table shown in FIG. 31 (D), the ratio of the judgment values assigned to simplify the explanation is It is shown. Also, in steps S8004a, S8005a, and S8006a in which those tables are used, as in step S8003a, for example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Determine what you have.

  In step S8004a, step S8005a, and step S8006a, using the button serif announcement effect execution determination table, the button cut-in announcement effect execution determination table, and the lever announcement effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to (D), respectively Whether or not to execute is determined (decision is made as either "no execution", "execution with first effect mode" and "execution with second effect mode"). In addition, deciding to "does not perform" is deciding to not perform the effect, and it is decided that "is in execution, first effect mode" or "is in execution, second effect mode" That is, it is determined to execute the rendering in the rendering mode of the “first rendering mode” or the “second rendering mode”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), it is possible to execute the button serif announcement effect in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the button serif notice effect, the first button serif notice effect image indicating the character saying the line of “?” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”. In the "second effect mode", a second button speech dialogue notice effect image showing a character that says a speech of "chance!" Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first button serif notification effect image and the second button serif notification effect image may be collectively referred to as button serif notification effect images.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31C, the button cut-in notice effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the button cut-in notice effect, a first button cut-in notice effect image showing a message of “appropriate!” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”. In the “second effect mode”, a second button cut-in notice effect image showing a message of “excessive heat!” Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first button cut-in notice effect image and the second button cut-in notice effect image may be collectively referred to as a button cut-in notice effect image.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31D, the lever advance notice effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the lever advance presentation effect, a first lever announcement effect image indicating the character of "defeat ..." is displayed in the "first effect mode", and " In the second effect mode, a second lever advance notice effect image indicating the word "winning!" Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first lever preview image and the second lever preview image may be collectively referred to as a lever preview image.

  What is characteristic in each effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D) is that if the variation pattern includes super reach rather than the variation pattern not including super reach, the display result is also The determination value is set such that the percentage determined to be “performed” is higher if the jackpot is larger than the departure. By providing such a feature, the rate at which a variation pattern (e.g., develop into a super reach) of advantageous rendering pattern is higher when the rendering is performed is higher than when the rendering is not performed. And the rate at which the display result is a big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the feature preview effect, the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in preview effect, and the lever preview effect.

  Further, in each effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to (D), the characteristic is that the variation pattern including the super reach is displayed more than the variation pattern not including the super reach. The determination value is set such that the proportion determined as the “second effect mode” becomes higher than the “first effect mode” if the result is a big hit rather than an off state. By having such a feature, the variation pattern (for example, developing into a super reach) of the advantageous design pattern is more advantageous when executed in the “second effect mode” than the “first effect mode”. The rate at which the display result is a big hit can be made high. That is, the “second effect mode” is a effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the “first effect mode”. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in advance effect, and the lever advance effect are executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the button serif announcement effect is executed before reaching the reach state, and the button cut-in announcement effect is executed after the reach state (see FIG. 30A). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31C, the button cut-in notice effect is executed only in the case of the variation pattern including the super reach. Therefore, the button cut-in notice effect is an effect having a high expectation of becoming a variation mode (for example, developing into a super reach) of the effect pattern more advantageous than the button serif notifying effect, and a high expectation of becoming a big hit. In other words, it can be said that the effect is highly important. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the button cut-in notice effect with a high degree of expectation (that is, the degree of importance) is executed, the feature notice effect is not performed at the same time (FIG. 30A). reference). By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on effects that have a high degree of expectation (that is, importance), and it is possible to perform effects effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31D, in the case of the fluctuation pattern including the super reach, the lever advance notice effect is always executed. Then, when the display result is a release, a first lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "loss ..." is displayed (a lever advance notice effect is executed according to the first effect mode), and the display result is a big hit In this case, a second lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "winning!" Is displayed (a lever advance notice effect is executed according to the second effect mode). That is, the lever advance notice effect is an effect that indicates whether the display result is a loss or a big hit. Therefore, compared with the button serif announcement effect or the button cut-in announcement effect which suggests the possibility that the lever announcement effect will become the fluctuation aspect (for example, developing into the super reach) of the advantageous production pattern or the possibility of becoming a big hit , It is an effect of high importance. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when a lever advance notice effect is executed, a feature advance notice effect is not executed at the same time (see FIG. 30A). By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on effects that have a high degree of expectation (that is, importance), and it is possible to perform effects effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lever advance notice effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 is the button serif notice effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 or the like. The degree of expectation (that is, the degree of importance) is configured to be higher than that of the button cut-in notice effect. By this configuration, it is possible to differentiate the effects and to give the player a sense of expectation for the operation of the stick controller 122. In other words, it is possible to give the player a special feeling of expectation about performing a specific operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, among the effects to be executed based on the detection of the player's action, the effect to be executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 (in this example, the button serif notice In the stage effect), the feature preview effect may be executed at the same time, but the lever preview effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 is the feature preview effect at the same time It is configured not to be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the effects and to make the effects easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, the timing at which each of the character preview effect, the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in preview effect, and the lever preview effect is determined is determined. It is possible to perform the feature preview effect and button speech preview effect at a plurality of timings before reaching reach) and after reaching the reach, or at a plurality of timings after the reach is established. It may be made executable. In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the timing at which the effect is performed. However, in order to pay attention to the effect with a high degree of expectation (importance) and to effectively perform the effect, the feature advance notice effect may not be executed at the same time as the button cut-in advance notice effect or the lever advance notice effect. desirable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown to FIG. 31 (A), although it is comprised so that a character thing preliminary | backup advance production | presentation may be performed by a single production | presentation aspect, it is good also as executable by two or more kinds of presentation appearances. . For example, depending on the effect mode, the period during which the accessory 200 stops at the effect position may be different, or the effect sound output at the time of movement of the accessory 200 may be different, or The light emitting body such as the LED provided in the light source may be lighted in a different mode. Also in this case, the suggested degree of expectation may differ depending on the presentation mode. In addition, the feature previewing effect of the rendering aspect having a high degree of expectation may be configured not to be performed at the same time as the button speech preview rendering.

  In addition, the role feature 200 may be used for effects other than the feature preview effect performed after the start of the change. For example, it may be used also for effects performed when reach is established, when reach is developed, when a big hit is determined, or the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern is divided into five types, and it is determined whether or not each presentation is to be performed, and the presentation mode in the case of execution is determined. Absent. For example, also for variation patterns including super reach, depending on the type of super reach (in this example, super reach A or super reach B in this example), it is determined whether or not to perform each effect, the effect mode in the case of executing You may do so.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31D, the lever advance notice effect may not be performed at a constant rate even in the case of a super reach failure or a super reach.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an infrared sensor, an optical sensor, etc. The motion of the player may be detected by a non-contact type sensor. Also in this case, depending on the degree of expectation, the operation of the player serving as an opportunity to execute the effect may be different. For example, the effect performed based on the detection of the operation by the non-contact type sensor has a higher expectation than the effect performed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 It may be

  In step S8008 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S8008), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8009).

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 32 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In this embodiment, by executing predetermined processing (for example, the processing of steps S8106 to S8175 described later) in the effect symbol variation processing, the character article announcement effect, the button speech announcement effect, the button cut-in announcement effect and Since the lever advance presentation effect is realized, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected in step S8008 regardless of which of these effects is executed. Note that scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each effect is stored in advance, and processing is performed based on the data to realize each button effect. Although this can be done, each effect can be realized while suppressing an increase in the amount of data by adopting the configuration of this embodiment.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is described where it is possible to execute a feature previewing effect, a button speech previewing effect, a button cut-in previewing effect and a lever previewing effect as effects during variation. It may be determined whether or not the mini character preview effect etc. is to be executed, and the preview effect may be executed based on the determination result. If it is decided to execute such a notice effect, a process table corresponding to the notice effect may be selected in step S8008. That is, even if scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each notice effect is stored in advance and the process is executed based on those data, the notice effect can be realized. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect display device 9 as a effect component, effect component as a effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8010). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8011).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8012).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 33 to FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the process (step S802) during effect symbol variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the in-figure preview effect executing flag indicating that the in-figure preview effect is being executed is set (step S8106). When the flag preview effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8112.

  If the bonus character announcement effect in-progress flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the bonus character preview effect waiting flag is set (step S8107). If the bonus character presentation effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  If the feature preview effect waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the feature preview effect (that is, the timing to move the feature 200 to the effect position by the feature preview effect). (Step S8108). If it is not the start timing of the feature preview effect, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  If it is the start timing of the feature preview effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the feature preview effect waiting flag (step S8109) and sets the flag of the feature preview effect under execution (step 8110). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the character 200 to move from the initial position to the effect position (step S8111). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8112, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing (that is, the timing to move the character 200 from the effect position to the initial position) of the effect notification of the effect notification (step S8112). Then, if it is the end timing of the prize preview effect, control is performed to move the prize 200 from the effect position to the initial position (step S8113). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 resets a flag during the execution of the bonus character announcement effect (step S8114). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8120, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the button serif notification effect enabling flag indicating that the button serif notification effect is being detected is in effect (step S8120). If the button serif notification effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  If the button serif announcement effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the button serif announcement effect standby flag is set (step S8121). If the button serif notification effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When the button serif notice effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the button serif notice effect (that is, the detection start period of the button serif notice effect) Step S8122). If it is not the start timing of the button serif announcement effect, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When it is the start timing of the button serif notice effect, that is, when the start time of the button serif notice effect detection start period, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button serif notice effect standby flag (step S8123) and the button. A speech advance notice effect effective flag is set (step 8124). In addition, the effect control CPU 101, in the effect display device 9, as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120, an operation promotion image of an aspect in which the push button 120 is not jumped out (see FIG. 38 (B) etc. While displaying the effect of the operation of other operation units and displaying the remaining effective period image, control is performed (steps S8125 and S8126). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  The other operation unit of the push button 120 is the stick controller 122 and the trigger button 121 in this embodiment, but may be an operation unit operable by the player. For example, it may be a handle button which is an operation unit provided on the hitting operation handle 5. In addition, settings such as the setting of the volume of the effect sound, the setting of the brightness of the lamp such as the effect display device 9 and the frame LED 28, the setting of the effect mode, and the setting for acquisition on the portable terminal such as the game history It may be a cross key or an enter key.

  In this embodiment, depending on the remaining period of the detection effective period, the ratio of the indication area in the meter display area is different and the remaining effective period image is updated and displayed to indicate the remaining period of the detection effective period. It is configured. That is, the meter display area in the remaining effective period image indicates the entire detection effective period, and the indication region indicates the remaining period of the detection effective period. Specifically, when the detection effective period is started, the remaining effective period image in which the indication area occupies the entire area of the meter display area (for example, the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. A remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period shown in FIG. 38C) in which the proportion of the indication region to the meter display region decreases according to the decrease in the remaining period of the detection effective period. The image 202) is displayed, and when the detection valid period ends (or when a predetermined operation is detected), a remaining valid period image in which the proportion of the indication area in the meter display area is 0 is displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining period of the detection effective period by confirming the state of the remaining effective period image. In this embodiment, the remaining effective period image in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0 is also referred to as the effective period end image, and the effective period detection end is ended by displaying the effective period end image. The notification of the end of the detection effective period to notify that is performed.

  In step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether an operation of any of the operation units has been detected (step S8127). When the operation of any of the operation units is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start processing in the effect display device 9 according to the effect mode of the button serif notification effect stored and stored. Control is performed to display a button serif announcement effect image (for example, an image showing a character that says a serif of “?” Or “chance!”) (Step S8128). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8128a).

  In other words, when the push button 120 does not jump out, the operation promotion image of the push button 120 does not jump out, and the operation other than the push button 120 with respect to the mode not jumped out is regarded as valid. Even when the unit is operated, an effect in the same effect mode as when the push button 120 is operated is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8129). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8130). For example, an image including characters such as "end" is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button serif notification effect effective flag (step S8131). The button speech notification effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8127, if no operation of any operation unit is detected either, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the button serif announcement effect (that is, the end timing of the detection period of the button serif announcement effect). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S8132). Then, if it is the end timing of the button serif announcement effect, the process proceeds to step S8129. Also, if it is not the end timing of the button speech notification effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8133). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  If it is determined in step S8132 that the button serif announcement end timing is reached, the process may proceed to step S8128a. Further, the process of step S8130 may not be performed.

  In step S8134, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a button cut-in advance notification effect effective flag indicating that the button cut-in notification effect is being detected is in effect (step S8134). If the button cut-in advance announcement effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8141.

  If the button cut-in advance notice effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the button cut-in advance notice waiting flag is set (step S8135). If the button cut-in notification effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If the button cut-in notice effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the button cut-in notice effect (that is, the detection start period of the button cut-in notice effect). It confirms (step S8136). If it is not the start timing of the button cut-in notification effect, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If it is the start timing of the button cut-in notification effect, that is, the detection start period of the button cut-in notification effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button cut-in notification effect standby flag (step S8137). At the same time, the button cut-in notice effect effective flag is set (step 8138). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 is an operation promotion image in which the push button 120 of an aspect different from the operation promotion display in step S8125 jumps out as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9 (described later 39B) and the effect that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid, and controls the button fly actuator 128 to execute the control of causing the push button 120 to fly, and the remaining valid Control to display the period image is performed (steps S8139A, S8139B, S8140). Then, it transfers to step S8141.

  In step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 has been detected (step S8141). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines, in the effect display processing, the effect pattern start processing in the effect display device 9 according to the effect mode of the button cut-in notice effect stored. Control to display a cut-in notice effect image (for example, a first button cut-in notice effect image indicating a message of “good opportunity!”, Or a second button cut-in notice effect image indicating a message of “superheat!”) (Step S8142). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8142a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8143). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8144). For example, an image including characters such as "end" is displayed. Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the button jumping actuator 128 to execute a control for retracting the push button 120 (step S8144A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button cut-in advance notification effect effective flag (step S8145). The button cut-in notice effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8141, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the operation of another operation unit different from the push button 120 is detected (step S8148). If an operation of another operation unit is detected, the effect control CPU 101 displays that the operation is invalid (see FIG. 39D) (step S8149). The display indicating that the operation is invalid is deleted after being displayed for a short time (for example, about one second), and if it is within the valid period of the operation, the original operation promotion display is displayed.

  That is, when the operation promoting image of the push button 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is jumping out, the operation of the operation unit other than the push button 120 with respect to the jumping out mode is not made effective determination. When the operation unit is operated, an effect different from the effect to the operation of the push button 120 (effect to notify that the operation of the operation unit other than the push button 120 is invalid) is executed.

  When the operation of the other operation unit is not detected, and after step S8149, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button cut-in notice effect (that is, the detection valid period end time of the button cut-in notice effect). Whether or not it is confirmed (step S8146). Then, if it is the end timing of the button cut-in notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8143. If the end timing of the button cut-in advance notice effect is not reached, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8147). Then, it transfers to step S8162.

  If it is determined in step S8146 that the end timing of the button serif cut-in notification effect is reached, the process may move to step S8142a. Also, the process of step S8144 may not be performed.

  In the embodiment described above, when the player presses the push button 120 and then the push button 120 is released while the push button 120 is jumping out, the push button 120 jumps out to the original state. In order to return, it is necessary to execute an operation for retracting the push button 120 in step S8144A.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is flying, if the player presses the push button 120 until the mode is not in a mode in which it does not fly You may make it maintain the aspect which has not come out. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the operation of retracting the push button 120 in step S8144A.

  Also, in this case, if the player does not press the push button 120 in the middle until the push button 120 is pressed, the push button 120 is not popped up next. The mode may be maintained as it is until it is pressed. In this case, when the push button 120 is pressed until the push button 120 is not popped up next, the push button 120 is maintained as it is.

  In addition, when the player presses the push button 120 until the button is not popped out, the process of step S8144A is not performed, but the player does not press the push button 120 at all, and the push button 120 The process of step S8144A may be executed only when the player stops pressing in the middle of the process until the player does not fly out.

  In step S8162, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not a lever advance announcement effect effective flag indicating that it is in the detection effective period of the lever advance announcement effect is set (step S8162). If the lever advance announcement effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  If the lever advance notice effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the lever advance notice effect standby flag is set (step S8163). If the lever preview effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  If the lever advance presentation effect waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the lever advance presentation effect (that is, the detection start period of the lever advance effect presentation) (step S8164) . If it is not the start timing of the lever advance presentation effect, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  When it is the start timing of the lever advance effect, that is, when the detection start period of the lever advance effect is started, the effect control CPU 101 resets the lever advance effect standby flag (step S8165) and the lever advance effect is effective. The flag is set (step 8166). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to display the operation promotion image and display the remaining effective period image as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the stick controller 122 (steps S8167 and S8168). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  In step S8169, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 has been detected (step S8169). When the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display processing in the effect display device 9 a lever advance effect according to the effect mode of the lever advance effect determined and stored. Control is performed to display an image (for example, a first lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "losing ..." or a second lever advance notice image indicating the character of "win!") (Step S8170). Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8170a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8171). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8172). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the lever advance notification effect effective flag (step S8173). The lever advance presentation effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8169, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is not detected, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the lever advance effect (that is, the detection valid period end timing of the lever advance effect). It confirms (step S8174). And if it is the completion | finish timing of lever advance production, it will transfer to step S8171. Also, if it is not the end timing of the lever advance presentation effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8175). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  In step S8176, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step S8176), the CPU for effect control 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S803) Step S8177).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S8130, S8144, and S8172 in the effect symbol variation processing, even when a predetermined operation is performed before the end of the detection valid period, the detection is valid. Since the period end notification is performed, it is possible to easily recognize that the detection effective period has ended based on the operation.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, after displaying the button serif notice effect image, the button cut-in notice effect image and the lever notice effect image, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are erased, and the effective period ends. Although it is configured to display an image, for example, after deleting the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image and displaying the effective period end image, a button speech notification effect image, a button cut in advance effect image, and a lever The preview effect image may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are configured to be deleted at the end timing of the detection period of the button serif notification effect image and the button cut-in advance effect and lever advance effect detection. However, the operation prompting image and the remaining valid period image (or only one of them) may be deleted before the predetermined period of time when the detection valid period ends. By configuring in this manner, the operation performed at the timing when the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are deleted is not detected as the operation within the detection effective period, and the player may feel distrust Can be avoided. In this case, it is desirable that the difficult-to-view state by the accessory 200 be resolved before a predetermined period of time at which the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image (or only one of them) are erased.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process of finalizing the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed The process moves to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the processing ends.

  If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b). Further, control is performed to display the stop symbol (off symbol, big hit symbol) of the rendering symbol that has been determined (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (ie, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303, the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311 Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the feature previewing effect and the button speech previewing effect. In the effect display device 9, after the variable display of the effect pattern is started (FIG. 38 (A)), when the feature advance notice effect and the button speech advance notice effect are started, the control of moving the role object 200 to the effect position is While being started, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an operation prompting image 201A imitating the appearance of the push button 120, the remaining effective period image 202, and the effect that operations other than the push button 120 are also displayed are displayed. (FIG. 38 (B)). Unlike the operation prompting image 201B described later with reference to FIG. 39 (B), the operation prompting image 201A simulates the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not jumped out. Then, the accessory 200 gradually moves toward the rendering position, and the remaining effective period image 202 indicates the remaining period according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period) (see FIG. In the example of 38, the shaded area is updated) so that the proportion of the meter display area is reduced (FIG. 38 (C)).

  Next, when the prize 200 reaches the rendering position, it stops for a predetermined period (FIG. 38 (D)). At this time, the operation promoting image 201A by the button speech preview effect and the remaining effective period image 202 are obscured by the character 200 and difficult to be recognized. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the operation promoting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are configured to be larger in size than the accessory 200, so they are completely visible. It does not mean that it will not be possible, but some will always be visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect).

  Next, the bonus 200 stops at the effect position for a predetermined period, and then moves to the initial position (FIG. 38E). In this embodiment, the button speech preview effect is configured to end later than the feature preview effect. That is, the detection effective period of the button serif announcement effect is configured to end later than the period in which the operation prompting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are in a state where visual recognition is difficult. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), the operation promoting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are displayed on the effect display device after the character 200 returns to the initial position, that is, even after the hard-to-see state disappears It is displayed on 9.

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 or the other operation unit is detected, a first button serif announcement effect image 203 indicating a character saying the word “chance!” Is displayed (FIG. 38 (F)).

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the button cut-in notice effect. In the effect display device 9, after the variable display of the effect symbol is in the reach state (FIG. 39 (A)), when the button cut-in notice effect is started, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays FIG. The operation prompting image 201B different from the operation prompting image 201A of (B) and imitating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is jumping out, the remaining valid period image 202, and the operations other than the push button 120 are invalid. The message is displayed (FIG. 39 (B)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the cut-in image 204 including the character of “excessive heat!” Is displayed (FIG. 39 (C)). When the operation of the push button 120 is not detected and the operation of the other operation unit is detected, the cut-in image 205 including the character of "the operation is invalid" is displayed (FIG. 39D).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player, and the movable member (the action of performing the predetermined action) In the example, an accessory 200) and detection effective period display means for displaying a detection effective period display (in this example, a remaining effective period image) indicating that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection effective period There is. Then, in the detection effective period display, a state where the at least a part is hidden by operating the movable member (for example, a state in which the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. In some cases, the detection effective period ends later than the period in which the detection effective period display is in the difficult-to-view state (for example, as shown in FIG. After returning, i.e., after the invisibility state of the remaining effective period image is eliminated, the effective period of detection ends. Therefore, the movable member can be operated, and the player can be prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  For example, the movable member operates by simply combining the configuration for displaying the detection valid period display indicating that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection valid period, and the configuration for executing the effect for operating the movable member. As a result, the display of the detection effective period is concealed, and the player may miss the detection effective period. Therefore, in this embodiment, by configuring the detection effective period to end later than the period when the detection effective period display is in the visual recognition difficult state by the movable member, it is possible to execute the effect of operating the movable member The player is prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button 120 or the stick controller may be used. Whether or not an operation such as continuous hit operation or long press operation has been detected or whether or not an operation to input predetermined information (for example, a specific command or the like) has been performed using the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 etc. By this, the action of the player may be detected. Also, in place of or in addition to the push button 120 and the stick controller 122, when the operation of the player is detected, a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor for inputting a detection signal is provided. The motion of the player may be detected.

  Further, in this embodiment, at least a part of the detection effective period display can be visually recognized even when it is in the visually difficult state (for example, as shown in FIG. 38D, the remaining effective period image 202 is Even in the state of being obscured by the accessory 200, it does not mean that it becomes completely invisible, but a part is always visible. Therefore, the movable member can be operated, and the player can be prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  In this embodiment, the detection effective period display (in this example, the remaining effective period image) is configured such that at least a part can be visually recognized even in the visual difficulty state. It may be configured to be in a hard-to-see state where the member (in this example, the accessory 200) is completely concealed by the operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable member operates as an example in the case where the display of the detection effective period is in the visual recognition difficult state (in this example, the role object 200 moves to the rendering position and stops for a predetermined period) Although the description has been made of the state in which the portion overlapping with the movable member is not visible and only the portion not overlapping is visible, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the movable member operates continuously (specifically, the bonus 200 The control of moving the front of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is repeatedly performed to make the detection effective period display inconspicuous (the remaining effective period image can be viewed at a timing when it is difficult to see but does not overlap with the feature 200) A state in which the detection effective period display is hard to be seen by overlapping the semi-transparent movable member with the detection effective period display (the remaining effective through the symbol 200 of things that are difficult to see During image visually recognizable), etc. are also included when detection validity indication is concealment state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means for executing the effect during the variable display is provided, and the effect execution means detects the effect based on the detection means detecting the action of the player (in this example, the button Detection effect executing means for executing serif announcement effect, button cut-in announcement effect, lever announcement effect, movable member effect execution means for executing movable member effect (in this example, bonus object announcement effect) for operating the movable member In the period before the variable display reaches the reach state, the detection effect and the movable member effect can be performed at the same time (for example, as shown in FIG. 30A, the period before the reach state). In the above, the button serif announcement effect and the feature announcement effect can be performed at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to important effects and to perform effects effectively.

  In addition, "performing a detection effect and a movable member effect at the same time" is a concept including not only the thing in which an execution period corresponds completely but the thing in which a part of execution periods overlaps. Even when the execution periods of the detection effect and the movable member effect completely coincide with each other, the operation mode of the movable member (for example, the movement start timing or movement speed to the effect position, the moving path, the stopping period at the effect position, initial stage The detection valid period display (in this example, within the detection valid period) by adjusting the movement start timing to the position, the moving speed, the moving route), and the display mode (for example, display size or display position) of the detection valid period display It is possible to provide a period in which the remaining effective period image is not in a difficult-to-see state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the detection effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of detection effects (in this example, button serif announcement effect, button cut-in announcement effect, lever announcement effect, etc.) having different degrees of expectation, The execution means does not simultaneously execute the detection effect and the movable member effect whose expectation is higher than the predetermined degree (in this example, the button cut-in notification effect and the expectation (importance) higher than the button serif notification effect and It is configured such that it is not performed at the same time as the lever preview effect and the feature preview effect (see FIG. 30). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect with a high degree of expectation.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of detection means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) capable of detecting the motions of players different from each other are provided, and the detection effect execution means comprises the plurality of detection means. The specific detection effect (in this example, a lever advance effect in this example) can be executed based on the detection of the player's action by the specific detection means (in this example, the stick controller 122). The specific detection effect and the movable member effect are not performed at the same time (for example, the lever preview effect and the feature preview effect are not performed at the same time. See FIG. 30). Therefore, by providing a specific detection effect that is not executed simultaneously with the movable member effect, the effect can be made easy to understand. That is, among the detection effects performed based on the detection of the player's action, the detection effects performed based on the detection of the push button 120 by the player are performed at the same time as the bonus announcement effect. Although the specific detection effect performed based on the detection of the player by the stick controller 122 may not be performed at the same time as the feature preview effect, Differentiation of the detection effect can be achieved, and the effect can be made easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, the detection effect (in this example, the button cut-in advance effect and the lever advance effect) and the specific detection effect (in the present embodiment, the lever advance effect) are in the reach state. , And may be configured to be executable before reaching the reach state. In addition, even when it is executed before reaching the reach state, detection effect (in this example, button cut-in notice effect and lever notice effect) or specific detection effect (in this example, lever notice) The effect) may not be performed at the same time as the movable member effect (in the present example, the feature announcement effect).

  Further, in this embodiment, after the feature preview effect is finished by executing the character preview effect and the button speech preview effect according to a predetermined execution period and execution timing (that is, the remaining effective period image The detection validity period of the button serif announcement effect is ended after the recognition of the difficult-to-recognize condition), but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The execution period and the execution timing of the speech advance notice effect are determined respectively, and the detection validity period by the button speech advance notice effect ends after the announcement notice effect is finished (that is, after the visual difficulty state of the remaining effective period image disappears) Thus, processing for adjusting the execution period and the execution timing may be performed. In addition, for example, in the production design fluctuation start processing, processing to determine the execution period and execution timing of the character announcement notice production and the button speech preview production respectively is performed, in the production pattern fluctuation processing, while performing the production according to the decision, In the case of performing control to operate the object 200, after the completion of the feature preview effect is completed by extending the execution period (that is, the detection valid period) of the button serif preview effect or shifting the execution timing (that is, Alternatively, the detection validity period by the button serif announcement effect may be ended after the visual difficulty state of the remaining validity period image is eliminated).

  Further, based on the detection of the player's motion detected by the detection means, the timing to execute the detection effect is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, but during the pseudo-series effect or during the advance notice effect, the big hit It may be any timing such as during presentation. In this case, one of the plurality of detection effects may be performed at different rates according to the timing of execution. For example, when performing a detection effect during a pseudo-series effect, before and after the temporary stop of the effect pattern in the pseudo-series effect (or depending on how many times the pseudo-series is performed), at different rates Either the button serif announcement effect or the button cut-in announcement effect may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable member effect (in the present example, the character announcement effect) and the detection effect (in the present embodiment, the button speech announcement effect, the button cut-in announcement effect, the lever announcement effect) Although it has been suggested by different expectations that the jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as an advantageous fluctuation mode (such as super reach) or the display result of the fluctuation display, it is not limited to this, and so-called prefetching notice As in the above, the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display based on any one of the reserved memories by different degrees of expectation. For example, a big hit occurs with a different degree of expectation by changing the hold display to any of a plurality of display modes based on movement of the movable member or detection of an operation during the detection effective period. It may be suggested that. Also in this case, the detection valid period is ended after the period in which the operation promoting image or the remaining valid period image is in the difficult-to-view state by the movable member, or the operation promoting image or the remaining valid period image is viewed It is desirable that at least a portion be always visible even in difficult situations.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of each production of button serif announcement notification production, button cut-in announcement presentation production, and lever announcement presentation production in production design fluctuation start processing may be determined It may be configured to determine in the middle processing. For example, in the effect design variation start process, whether or not each effect is to be executed, the detection effective period in the case of execution is determined, and the display is performed when the operation is detected during the detection effective period in the effect symbol processing. A presentation aspect such as an image to be output or a presentation sound to be output may be determined, and the presentation may be performed by the determined presentation aspect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types according to the player's operation of the start lever The symbol is rotated, and when the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, the combination of the stop symbol becomes a combination of a specific symbol, and this applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, in the case where the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, a movable member effect for operating the movable member can be performed at an arbitrary timing such as during rotation of a symbol, and an operation promoting image and remaining valid A period image is displayed, and a detection effect is performed based on the operation of the stop button (or an operation button provided separately from the stop button), thereby causing a drop in a part (for example, a big bonus or a regular bonus). Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate the presence or absence of freeze effect, the result of RT (replay time) lottery, the result of AT (assist time) lottery, the result of ART (assist replay time) lottery, and the like. Also in this case, the detection valid period is ended after the period in which the operation promoting image and the remaining valid period image are difficult to be recognized by the movable member, or the operation promoting image and the remaining valid period image are viewed It is desirable that at least a part be visible so as to be visible even in a difficult state.

[Effect of First Embodiment]
The effects obtained by the embodiments described above are summarized below.

(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
First operation means (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, determination key for setting) operable by the player;
A second operation means (for example, an operation unit other than the push button 120 if the first operation means is the push button 120) operable by the player and different from the first operation means;
From the first aspect (for example, an aspect in which a button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38 (B) or the like) or a second aspect (for example, from the first aspect) Operation prompting display means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, effect display device 9, FIG. 39) which can be displayed in a mode which strongly urges the player to operate the game or a mode in which the button is popped out as shown in FIG. 34 step S8125, and FIG. 35 step S8139 A),
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the operation promotion display being performed by the operation promotion display means (for example, micro for effect control Computer 100 and effect display device 9);
The effect executing means is
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as valid determination (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), FIG. As shown in step S8128 and FIG. 38F, the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif announcement effect image is executed.
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination (for example, step S8149 of FIG. 35, FIG. An effect of notifying that the operation is invalid is executed as indicated by).

  According to such a configuration, whether or not to determine the validity differs depending on the operation means operated according to the mode of the operation promotion display. For this reason, the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The operation promotion display means executes the operation promotion display so that the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the mode of the operation promoting display of the button cut-in notice effect is executed rather than when the mode of the operation promoting display of the button serif preview effect is performed. The rate at which the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher.

  According to such a configuration, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the operation prompting display of the second aspect is executed than in the first aspect. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation promotion display, and the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The first operation means can be changed from the normal mode to the specific mode (for example, the shape, the pattern, the color, or the like can be changed such that the push button 120 pops out),
When the first operation means is in the specific mode, the effect execution means does not determine the operation of the second operation means as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, the operation of the second operation means The same effect as the effect for the operation may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and the operation is invalid as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). You may perform the production | presentation which notifies that.).

  According to such a configuration, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is not executed even when the second operation means is operated. Therefore, the operation of the first operation means can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An instruction display means capable of displaying an explanation to the effect that the operation of the second operation means is determined to be effective when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8125, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  According to such a configuration, the player is easily informed that the determination is made effective even when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from wondering which operation means to operate.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The information processing apparatus further includes indication display means capable of displaying an indication that the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8139A and FIG. 39 (B), it displays that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is not determined as an effective determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second operating means in anticipation that the same effect as when the first operating means is operated is performed without the player being aware.

Modification of First Embodiment
The modification of embodiment mentioned above below is shown.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine different from the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a slot machine, as described above, the first operating means, the second operating means, the operation promoting display means, and the effect executing means And the effect execution means determines the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode as the effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the first mode, but the operation of the first operation means When the prompting display is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode may not be determined as the valid determination.

  In this case, the first operation means is, for example, an operation unit similar to the push button 120 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and the second operation means is, for example, a BET button or start lever different from the push button 120 Another operation unit such as a stop button. The operation promotion display means, for example, performs the operation promotion display at the timing when the rotation of the symbol is not started by the freeze effect being executed after the start lever is operated, or at the timing until the first stop of the symbol. It is possible to display in one mode or the second mode, and the effect execution means is, for example, the timing after the rotation of the symbol is started after the freeze effect, or the timing until the third stop of the symbol (the last symbol is stopped) The effect can be performed when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the execution of the operation prompting display.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the first operation means is the push button 120, and the second operation means is the trigger button 121 and the stick controller 122 which are operation units different from the push button 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation parts. For example, conversely, the second operation means may be the push button 120, and the first operation means may be the trigger button 121 and the stick controller 122. Further, the first operation means may be an operation unit which is more difficult for the player to operate than the second operation means. Also, conversely, the first operation means may be an operation unit that is easier for the player to operate than the second operation means.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, in the operation prompting display, the first aspect of the aspect imitating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not jumping out, and the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is jumping out There are two aspects of the second aspect of the aspect that imitates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display may have two or more modes. For example, the aspect A imitating the appearance of the most popping out state of the push button out of a plurality of steps, the popping out in the middle of the state in which the push button is out of a plurality of steps The mode B simulating the appearance of the state and the mode C simulating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not popped out may be in the operation promotion display.

  In this case, when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is modes B and C, the operation of the operation unit other than the specific operation means is determined to be valid, and when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is mode A, An operation of an operation unit other than the specific operation unit may not be determined as valid. Moreover, when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is the mode C, the operation of the operation unit other than the specific operation means is determined to be effective, and when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is the modes A and B, the specific operation The operation of the operation unit other than the means may not be determined as the valid determination.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, it is determined that the operation of the second operation means is valid as shown in step S8128 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38F, when the operation prompting image of the push button 120 is in the first mode in which the display is not jumping out, the button serif notice for the push button 120 is also notified for operations other than the push button 120. The effect of the same effect aspect as the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect of the effect image is to be executed. That is, in order to determine that the operation of the second operation means is valid, the effect of the same effect mode as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is executed in response to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effective determination of the operation of the second operation means is the same character as an effect for the operation of the first operation means even for the operation of the second operation means May be performed. Also for the operation of the second operation means, an effect indicating that the character is speaking a serif having the same semantic content as the effect for the operation of the first operation means may be executed. Also for the operation of the second operation means, performing the same type of effect such as the effect for the operation of the first operation means and the effect of the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of the big hit expectation It may be Also for the operation of the second operation means, an effect associated with the effect for the operation of the first operation means, for example, a premium effect is executed for one operation and an associated non-premium effect for the other May be performed.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is in the second mode, the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as an effective determination, as shown in step S8149 of FIG. As shown in), when the operation promoting image of the push button 120 is the second mode in which the pop-up display is performed, an effect of notifying that the operation other than the push button 120 is invalid is executed. That is, not performing effective determination of the operation of the second operation means does not execute the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means with respect to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that no effect is executed for the operation of the second operation means not to effectively determine the operation of the second operation means. In this case, the displayed operation prompting is not erased if it is within the effective period of the operation.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is in the first mode, the operation of the second operation means for the first mode is regarded as effective determination in step S8129 in FIG. As shown, the operation prompting display is erased according to the operation. On the other hand, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination, and as described in step S8149 of FIG. The operation prompting display was not erased accordingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination, and the operation promotion display according to the operation May be deleted.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the button cut-in notice effect is more effective than when the operation promoting display mode of the button serif notice effect is executed. The percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the operation promotion display mode is executed. That is, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when executed is the second mode (button cut) than the first mode (the mode of the operation promotion display of the button serif announcement effect) The operation promotion display is performed so that the mode of the operation promotion display of the in advance notice effect is higher. When the rate at which the operation prompting display is executed in such an advantageous manner is high, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is also high.

  In the embodiment described above, the operation promotion display is executed in the first mode when the operation promotion display is executed in the second mode which urges the player to perform the operation more strongly than the first mode. Rather, it is determined that the rate at which the player is controlled to the advantageous state is higher. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is executed in the second mode is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player than when the operation prompting display is executed in the first mode. The ratio may be low.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, it is possible to change from the normal mode in which the push button 120, which is the first operation means, does not fly out, to the specific mode in which it pops out. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape, pattern or color of the first operation means or the combination thereof may be changeable from the normal mode to the specific mode. For example, when the lamp is provided inside the first operating means and the color of the first operating means is changed by the light emission of the lamp, the normal mode is white, and the specific mode is It may be red or iridescent.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, it is shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D) that the operation of the second operation means is not determined as valid. As described above, when it is a specific mode in which the push button 120 jumps out, an effect of notifying that an operation other than the push button 120 is invalid is executed. That is, not performing effective determination of the operation of the second operation means does not execute the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means with respect to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that no effect is executed for the operation of the second operation means not to effectively determine the operation of the second operation means.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S8125 of FIG. 34, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, as part of the explanation effect during the change display of the effect pattern, and the operation promotion display When the operation prompting display of the button 120 is not popped out, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is not executed, the operation prompting display of the push button 120 is a push button as an explanatory effect in the variable display of the effect pattern (for example, before reaching the reach state). When the mode 120 does not fly out, it may be displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S8139A of FIG. 36 and FIG. 39 (B), the push button is used as a part of the explanation effect during the change display of the effect pattern and the operation promotion display. When the operation prompting display 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is jumping out, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is not executed, the operation prompting display of the push button 120 is a push button as an explanatory effect in the variable display of the effect pattern (for example, before reaching the reach state) When the mode 120 is jumping out, it may be displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as the effective determination, but the first operation means When the operation prompting display of the second aspect is the second aspect, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second aspect is not regarded as the valid determination.

  However, when the operation promotion display of the second operation means is the first mode, the operation of the first operation means with respect to the first mode is determined to be effective, but the operation promotion display of the second operation means is the second mode In some cases, the operation of the first operation means with respect to the second aspect may not be determined as a valid determination.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, the operation prompting display of the first aspect and the second aspect is executable at different timings. Specifically, the operation promotion display of the first aspect can be executed at the timing when the button serif announcement effect is executed, and the operation promotion display of the second mode is executed at the timing when the button cut-in announcement effect is executed It was possible.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display of the first aspect and the second aspect may be executable in the same effect. For example, in a certain advance notice effect (for example, a button cut-in notice effect), the operation promotion display of the second mode is executed at a higher rate than the first mode, in order to set an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Good. Also, conversely, in a certain advance notice effect, the operation promotion display of the first aspect may be executed at a higher rate than the second aspect, in order to set an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, the effectiveness of the automatic operation function in which it is considered that the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is automatically executed even if the operation prompting display is not performed on the operation unit. And, the player may be configured to be able to set the invalidation.

  Even when such an automatic operation function is set to be effective, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is determined that the operation of the second operation means for the second mode is effective. Alternatively, the operation considered to be automatically executed by the automatic operation function may not be determined as the valid determination. For example, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the automatic operation function may be invalidated even if it is set to be effective.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the detection effective period display (for example, the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. 38 (B), FIG. 39 (B), etc.) is the operation of the first aspect and the second aspect It was decided to be the same size for any of the promptings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, so that a small detection effective period display is performed when executing the operation prompting display of the first aspect, and a large detection effective period display is executed when executing the operation prompting display of the second aspect. You may Also, conversely, when executing the operation prompting display of the first aspect, a large detection effective period display is executed, and when executing the operation prompting display of the second aspect, a small detection effective period display is executed. Good. When the same period is indicated, the speed of subtraction of the large detection effective period display may be made faster or slower than the small detection effective period display. As a result, the speed of subtraction varies depending on the size of the detection effective period display, so that the player can be focused on the detection effective period display.

  (16) The configuration described in the above-described embodiment can also be applied to a gaming system called a so-called portable interlocking system. In general, a gaming system called a mobile interlocking system is a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined benefit for the player based on predetermined information output by the gaming machine. And a privilege giving device for performing a process of giving.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine plays predetermined conditions such as the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of so-called consecutive villas (the number of big hits in a definite change state ongoing), and the number of mission achievements. It accumulates as a history and displays a two-dimensional code etc. as predetermined information at the end of the game. In addition, the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function, and transmits it to a Web server (a privilege giving device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of providing a predetermined benefit according to the game history. For example, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's portable terminal as a predetermined benefit, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's portable terminal, and the player next time When playing a game, processing is performed to enable customization of the display screen of the gaming machine according to the preference of the player.

  When the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a game system as described above, for example, the execution of the button cut-in notice effect of the second effect mode and the big hit is regarded as the establishment of the predetermined condition. The number of times may be managed by the Web server as a game history. Then, according to the number of times the button cut-in notice effect of the second effect mode is executed and a big hit is made, digital content may be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine may be customized. .

  (17) In the embodiment described above, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, “the proportions are different” means that the proportions are different only in a relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the like is also a concept including ones with different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the presentation control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the presentation device May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, as shown in FIG. Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4 and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The effect control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a premium of a predetermined number, The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  (22) In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but such variable display is such It is not limited to the form. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived need not necessarily be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  (24) In addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit will be made, and determines whether or not a variation pattern type will be winning (prefetch determination), and indicates the winning determination result A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted, and the preview control notice may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination. In addition, for example, it may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 40 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 2 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 6. The game board 6 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 6 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 40). The first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are each composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information), are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b is also referred to as "second special symbol" .

  The first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are both formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. In addition, the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type It may be different. The first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99", respectively. .

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 6, an image display device 9 is provided. The image display device 9 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 9, corresponding to variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a in the special figure game and variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 9, decorative pattern display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 8a and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 8b being started in the special figure game, In each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R in the image display device 9 is displayed. The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of image display device 9, the special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 8a, or the second special figure in second special symbol display device 8b. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) identification information such as a decorative symbol and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters are displayed on the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, eight character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow sequentially from the top to the bottom from the one with the highest symbol number to the next, and the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, A decorative symbol whose symbol number is the smallest (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 9L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from those with large symbol numbers to those with small symbols, When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

  In the display area of the image display device 9, a start winning storage display area 18c is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 18c, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display (number of special drawing holding memories) corresponding to the special drawing game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 13 and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 14 when the variable display corresponding to the special view game is held. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the hold of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the first hold for specifying the number of special view hold memories in a distinguishable manner on the top of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b together with the start winning storage display area 18c. An indicator 18a and a second hold indicator 18b are provided. The first hold indicator 18aA displays the first special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The second hold indicator 18b displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special view reservation storage number is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended. The second special view reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Under the image display device 9, a normal winning ball device 13 and a normal variable winning ball device 14 are provided. The regular winning ball device 13 forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 14 has a pair of movable wing pieces that changes between a normally open state in the vertical position and an enlarged open state in the tilting position by the solenoid 16 for the ordinary motorized product shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 14, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 16 for the normal motor vehicle is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 14, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric symbol is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. Although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 14 is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter the second starting winning hole more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 14 may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 13 is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 13a shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 14 is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 14a shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 13a, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 14a, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 13a and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 14a. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the normal winning ball device 13 and the normal variable winning ball device 14. The special variable winning prize ball device 20 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 21 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 41, and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 20, when the solenoid 21 for big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter) I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 20, when the solenoid 21 for the big winning mouth door is on, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning winning ball device 20, the gaming ball is moving other winning openings such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 20, the gaming ball can enter into the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 20, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball to the big winning hole, which is difficult for the player. It is a disadvantageous second state.

  An ordinary symbol display 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (in the example shown in FIG. 40, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 10 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is normally displayed (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game").

  Above the normal symbol display 10, a general drawing reserve display 41 is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 41 is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general drawing retention memories as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 32.

  On the surface of the game board 6, besides the above configuration, there are provided a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 2, speakers 27 for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 28 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 13, the normal variable winning ball device 14, the special variable winning ball device 20, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 2, a hitting operation handle (operating knob) is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 2 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied so as to be able to be supplied to a ball striking device (storage ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 2, a lower tray is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 122 which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 122 includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (e.g., a position at which the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. With the trigger button, while the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), a predetermined instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod may be provided inside the lower body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is a two transparent photosensor (parallel sensor) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 6 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 6 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 120 which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122) It is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120, for example, to detect a player's operation performed on the push button 120.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 10 such that the game ball having passed through the passing gate 32 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 32a shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is started, for example, that the previous normal drawing game has ended, after the normal drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied, the normal symbol display 10 The popular figure game by is started.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time elapses, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost" Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and opening control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 14 is tilted is performed. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is established by the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 13 is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a shown in FIG. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 8a is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 14 is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 8b is started.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, after the variable display of the special symbol is started after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. The finalized special symbol (special drawing display result) to be the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and special symbols indicating the number “2” are the small hit symbols. , A special symbol showing a symbol of "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 8a is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 8b. The special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 20 has a predetermined upper limit The big winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapse or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is brought into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 6, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 20 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round may be ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win a prize winning opening etc.) .

  Among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 20 the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open It is also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 20 in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that will be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "7" are normally open round big hit symbols, and the numbers of "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (usually open big hit state) as a normal opening round specified gaming state controlled after a normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning prize ball device 20 special winning opening The big winning opening is opened in a period until the door reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By doing this, a round is performed to change the special variable winning prize ball device 20 to the first state (opened state) advantageous to the player. In addition, a normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specified gaming state.

  In the jackpot gaming state (short-term opening jackpot state) as a short-term opening round specific gaming state controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period when the large winning opening is opened by the large winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state For one second). In the short-term open big hit state, the open period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and the other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds to be executed may be the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball is won in the large winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (eg, 0.1 second), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot gaming state in which the balls (prize balls) can not be obtained substantially. In addition, the short-term opening big hit state is also referred to as a second specified gaming state.

  Also, the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state is not limited to the one having a short opening time of the big winning opening compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specified playing state, for example, opening the big winning opening While the period (upper limit time) is the same for the short opening round specified gaming state and the normal opening round specified playing state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that makes the big winning opening open in the short opening round specified playing state is The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific gaming state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state, the period for changing the big winning opening to the first state in which the gaming ball easily passes (enters) in each round is the first period in the normal opening round specified gaming state Also, the second period may be at least one of a short second period and a second round number in which the number of round execution times is smaller than the first round number in the special open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the small hit symbol "2" is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed to change the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, an operation of setting the special variable winning prize ball device 20 in the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R provided in the image display device 9, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 8a Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 8b, the variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state.

  Here, with the reach state, a decorative symbol ("reach variation symbol") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 9 constitutes a part of the big hit combination The display state in which the fluctuation continues, or the display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L and 9R) in advance The decorative pattern display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative symbol showing "7" alphanumeric characters) constituting the defined big hit combination is stopped and displayed In the symbol display area 9C, etc.), the display condition in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or a part of the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display state fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Also, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 9, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 28, etc. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. And when the reach aspect of a super reach appears, possibility (big hit expectation) of a variable display result becoming "big hit" becomes high compared with the case where the reach aspect of normal reach appears.

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by a variable display mode of the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "simulated link" can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” or “simulated link” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 31 side. In addition, regardless of the change pattern determined on the main substrate 31 side, whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” may be determined on the side of the effect control substrate 80.

  In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle", "right", a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After displaying the decorative symbols in temporary stop display in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbol display areas displayed for temporary stop By changing the decorative pattern again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the decorative symbol display area 9L for “left” and the decorative symbol display area 9R for “right”) The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed temporarily for a predetermined number of times after variable display of decorative symbols is started and fixed decorative symbols to be variable display results are derived and displayed. By performing the variable display again for the decorative symbol of when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state is there.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being met once. After displaying the decorative symbols temporarily in all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R until the finalized decorative symbols are derived and displayed. Effects can be displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of three times) in which all the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R change the decorative symbol again (simulated continuous fluctuation). The number of times of pseudo series change is the display of "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display except for the first change from the start of variable display of decorative symbol to the temporary stop of all decorative symbols at first. It is the number of times that the decorative pattern changes again in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo ream chances predetermined in the left, "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R The decorative symbols that make up the image are temporarily displayed temporarily as a predetermined display result. After that, pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variable display) is performed. In this embodiment, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times in the variable display effect of the “pseudo-series”. Based on this, it is possible to make the variable display of the decorative pattern appear as if it had been started two to four times in succession. The number of times of pseudo series fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo series" may be made to be able to be performed more than once or three times, for example, four times or five times.

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to "slip" and "pseudo ream", for example, "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "slip after the chance eye stop" And various other rendering operations may be performed. Here, in the variable display effect of “the development chance eye”, “left”, “middle”, “right” until variable decoration result of the decorative symbol is started and the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R in all, the temporary display of the decorative symbol constituting the development chance included in the predetermined special combination, and then the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and after the reach state, the variable display result is the "big hit". Expectations are enhanced.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of "development chance eye end", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all in the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle", "right" An effect display is performed in which a decorative symbol of a combination predetermined as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) which becomes a pseudo recurrent chance in all of the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R in "left", "middle" and "right" Unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in which the decorative symbol is again changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the decorative symbol is changed again in part of the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R As a result, effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is performed, or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach-loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  Among the special symbols that are usually open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in the special figure game, the regular big hit symbols such as the special symbols indicating the number "3" and the definite variation big hit symbols such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" stop When it is displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state, after the predetermined reach effect is performed or the reach effect is not performed, a plurality of types of big hit combinations Among them, the finalized decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The finalized decorative symbols to be a big hit combination have symbol numbers “1” to “1”, for example, which are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 9, for example. Any one of the decorative symbols of "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. What is necessary.

  Whether to control to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state during execution of a predetermined round in the big hit gaming state after the definite decoration symbol to be a big hit combination is derived and displayed (whether a positive change as a privilege is given In the big hit during the jackpot promotion effect will be executed, which will be a bonus grant effect of whether or not. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot middle promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which the characters fight in the display area of the image display device 9 may be performed. Then, the player can be notified that the player can recognize the presence or absence of a promotion that becomes a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state (whether a positive change as a bonus is given or not) by victory or defeat of the main character. In addition, jackpot promotion promotion is not in execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the period from the end of any round at the start of the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the start of the next round, It may be performed in a period from the end of the last round in the jackpot gaming state to the start of the next variable display game. Furthermore, the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion".

  In the jackpot promotion promotion, it is informed that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a definite change state (informing that a privilege is given) the jackpot promotion promotion effect in a big hit, and a notification that it is not a definite change state There is with the jackpot promotion failure production which announces that the privilege is not granted. Then, when the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to a definite change state. On the other hand, when the jackpot promotion failure effect is performed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is not controlled to the definite change state (non-positive change state), and is controlled to the time saving state. In the probability change state, the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit game state is improved to be higher than the normal state or the time saving state in the variable display of each special drawing game or decorative symbol. . Such a definite change state continues until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" regardless of the number of times the special drawing game is executed. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In such a time saving state, when a special drawing game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first, finish.

  In a definite change state or a short time state, the control to shorten the variation time of a normal symbol (common figure variation time) in a regular drawing game with a regular symbol display 10 than in a normal state or a variable normal pattern in each regular drawing game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per commonplace" than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball device 14 based on the variable display result as "per commonplace" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is established. It should be noted that, in the definite variation state or the short time state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probability changing state or the time saving state and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 8b is more likely to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result is a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probability change state or the time reduction state, the jackpot gaming state is more likely than in the normal state (a gaming state advantageous to the player). The period during which high opening control can be performed is also called high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the probability changing state or the time saving state. . In addition, when it is high opening control period, it is also said that game state is high base. On the other hand, when the high opening control period is not in effect, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state also referred to as a low probability high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state also referred to as a low probability low base state. In addition, the definite change state is a gaming state also referred to as a high probability high base state. That is, when the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a probability change state, so that it is controlled to a high probability high base state. On the other hand, when the jackpot during promotion failure production is performed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is not controlled to a definite change state (non-positive change state), it is controlled to a time saving state, low probability high base It will be controlled to the state.

  The probability change state may include, in addition to the probability change control and the time reduction control or the high release control, or the one in which only the probability change control is performed and the time reduction control or the high release control is not performed. As an example, after the end of the 15 round jackpot state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become "probable variation big hit", the first probability variation state (high probability height) where time saving control and high open control are performed along with probability variation control (Also referred to as base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result becoming "big hit", although the probability change control is continuously performed, time saving control or high open control It may be made to be controlled to the 2nd probability change state (it is also called high probability low base state) which will not be performed after completion of. Moreover, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game becoming a "probable big hit" in the normal state, it shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed Time saving control or high release control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game becoming "suspicious big hit" when in the positive change state or the short time state, it shifts to the first positive change state, In addition to the probability change control, time saving control or high open control may be performed. Alternatively, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the “probable big hit”, the special figure display result is controlled to the first positive change state until the big hit again, while the 2 round big hit state based on the “probable big hit” After the end, the system shifts to the first definite variation state, and when the number of times the special figure game is executed reaches the predetermined number without the special figure display result becoming a "big hit", the second definite variation state is set. May be While time saving control and high release control are performed simultaneously (in conjunction) with their start and end, the start and end of the probability change control are not necessarily linked with the start or end of time reduction control or high release control. May be

  When the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a finalized special symbol in a special drawing game, and the small hitting symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number “2” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and one of the combinations of a plurality of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as the opening chance may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the short-term opening round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After, for example, a finalized decoration pattern (a short-term opening round, a finalized decoration pattern serving as a chance eye corresponding to a big hit state) may be stopped and displayed as a predetermined reach combination.

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various finalized decorative symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the short-term opening round big hit symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of a "probable" (also referred to as a "probable big hit" or "a sudden big change big hit"). It may be controlled to the short-term open jackpot state based on the variable display result becoming the "big hit" in the jackpot type of "probable".

  The small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed as a final symbol in the special drawing game, and the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the "small hit". After the end, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result is "small hit". However, when the special view game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of times the special view game has been executed in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit gaming state ends, The special gaming state may end and be in the normal state.

  When the special winning opening is opened after the finalized decorative symbol that constitutes the opening chance is derived as a result of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" There are times when it is controlled to the short-term opening big hit state on the basis, and when it is controlled to the small hitting game state on the basis of the fact that the variable indication result is “the small hitting”. On the other hand, after the finalized decoration pattern that constitutes the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decoration pattern, the large winning opening is opened after the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable". It is only when controlled based on the short-term open jackpot state. Therefore, while the fixed decoration design which constitutes the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to either the short-term opening big hit state and the small hit gaming state, the fixed decoration pattern of the reach combination is the short-term open big hit state It corresponds to being controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 31, a presentation control board 80, an audio control board 70, and a lamp control board 35 as shown in FIG. 41, for example, are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 77 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 6 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 31 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board comprising a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a rendering control board 80 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 31 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 or performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 10 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 31 may be, for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, a switch circuit 58 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 560 for game control, the microcomputer 560 for game control A solenoid circuit 59 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 16 and 21 is mounted.

  The effect control board 80 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 31, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 31 through the relay board 77, and receives the image display device 9, the speaker 27, the game Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the effect electric components such as the effect lamp 28 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 80 is for effect such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 9, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 27, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 28 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 70 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and based on a command from the effect control board 80, control data, etc., for outputting sound from the speaker 27. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 35 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80, lighting / extinguishing of the game effect lamp 28 etc. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the main substrate 31 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. It is sufficient if it has. In addition, the main substrate 31 includes a first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first hold indicator 18a, a second hold indicator 18b, and a common view hold indicator 41. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is relayed by the relay board 77. The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 9, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speaker 27, a game effect lamp 28, a decoration It includes a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

  The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main substrate 31 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 54 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 55 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and updating of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 56 A random number circuit 503 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 57 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes a program read from the ROM 54 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 56 reads fixed data from the ROM 54, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 56 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 55 by the CPU 56 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 56 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57, to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The random number circuit 503 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used to control the progress of the game. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 55, for example, to periodically or irregularly update various numerical data by software, thereby making a part of various random numbers. May be counted. The software executed by the CPU 56 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 503, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 503. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  In addition to the program for game control, various data for selection, table data, and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in the ROM 54 of the microcomputer 560 for game control. For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 54, table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a fluctuation pattern table storing plural kinds of fluctuation patterns are constituted. Table data etc. are stored.

  FIG. 42 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" or "reach", respectively. Among the cases where the display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “probable”, and further, the case where the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance. In addition, the change pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss fluctuation pattern") and variable The variation pattern corresponding to the display result of "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A and super reach B regardless of whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "losing". In the illustrated example, “slip” or “pseudo-run” in the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable”, or the variable display result is “small hit”. In the example of performing variable display effect such as “”, variable display effects such as “slip” and “simulated link” may be performed in other change patterns such as normal reach change pattern and super reach change pattern.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 41 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source which is partially or entirely produced on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply becomes unavailable Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In such a RAM 55, an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like is provided.

  The I / O 57 included in the game control microcomputer 560 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560, and transmits various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the effect control board 80 is provided with a CPU 101 for effect control which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 111 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area of the CPU 101 for effect control. RAM 112, a display control unit 109 that executes processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 9, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 101 A circuit 113 and an I / O 114 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 80, when the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 111, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 101 reads fixed data from the ROM 111, the variable data write operation in which the effect control CPU 101 writes various change data in the RAM 112 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 101 in the RAM 112 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 80 via the I / O 114, the effect control CPU 101 to I / O for effect control CPU 101 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 80 through O114 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 101, the ROM 111, and the RAM 112 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control substrate 80.

  In the effect control board 80, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 9, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 70, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 35 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 80, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 123 an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 122 has been detected, or a game for the push button 120 Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 124 an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 80, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 113 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 111 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 41 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 111, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 101, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized.

  As an example, in the ROM 111, the effect control CPU 101 is used to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 9, the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 28, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns is stored. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operations of decorative symbols, reach effects, effect display operations in re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content. For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  For example, when starting variable display of a decorative pattern, the effect control CPU 101 sets an effect control pattern (special pattern change effect control pattern) based on the change pattern or the like indicated by the change pattern designation command. The effect control CPU 101 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when starting execution of a predetermined effect such as an advance effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 111 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 112, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 111 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 112, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 111 may be designated. The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 101 to the display control unit 109, the voice control board 70, and the like. The display control unit 109 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 101 causes, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like to read out image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and expand it by temporarily storing in VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 70 which has received the command from the effect control CPU 101, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing in voice RAM or the like. . After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the

  The RAM 112 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.
In the main substrate 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 56 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 56 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 56 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 56 executes a game control timer interrupt process. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 56 first executes a predetermined switch process to count the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, and the switch circuit 58. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR3 used on the main substrate 31 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the RAM 55 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display in the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 56 controls the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 10 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 14 Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 transmits a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 80 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 80 among the output ports included in the I / O 57 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 55 After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, the transmission of effect control commands based on the settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 56 first executes a start winning determination process (step S9101). FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9101 of FIG. 43 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 56 first performs the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 13a provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 13. It is determined whether the start port switch 13a is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 13a is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the pending memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). The CPU 56 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value, which is a stored value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the RAM 55, for example. If it is determined in step S202 that the first special map storage number is not the upper limit (step S202; No), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 55 is set to "1" (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 13a is off at step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of first special view storage blocks has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; Yes) Based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 14a provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 14, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 14a is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 14a is on (step S204; Yes), the number of second special view pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S205). The CPU 56 only needs to be able to specify the second special-image pending storage number by reading the second pending-storage number count value, which is a storage value of a second pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 55, for example. If it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 55 is set to "2" (step S206).

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the number of to-be-saved special-image storages according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to add one (step S208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 55, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 56 selects, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 503 and the RAM 55, the random number value MR1 for special display display result determination and the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination. Are extracted (step S209). The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination determines whether or not the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game is controlled as a "big hit" or not and is controlled to a big hit gaming state. It is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the case where the variable display result is "big hit", as "non-probability change", "probability change", or "rapid probability" Is a random number value used for, for example, a value in the range of “0” to “99”. The CPU 56 executes the processing of step S209 to display numerical data representing a part or all of the random display value used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern or the variable display time. Extract. In this embodiment, the random number MR1 and the random number MR2 are extracted in the process of step S209. However, as described above, the random number MR2 is a random number used to determine the jackpot type. Because of the presence, it may be extracted only when the judgment result of the random value MR1 is "big hit". In this case, the random number value MR2 may be extracted after the determination in step S241 of FIG. 46 described later is YES.

  Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view holding storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as holding information (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 and MR2 are set in the first special view holding storage unit 151A as shown in FIG. When the value is “2”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2 is set in the second special image storage unit 151B as shown in FIG. 45 (B).

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 151A shown in FIG. 45A, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 13 and a start winning (first start winning) occurs. The reserved data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 8a) which has not been started yet is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The number of storages is a predetermined upper limit, with numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 503 etc. by the CPU 56 based on the establishment and numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for big hit type determination as reserve data. Store until a value (for example "4") is reached. The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game (special view display As a result, on-hold information is used to make it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is to be awarded based on the result.

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 151B shown in FIG. 45 (B), the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 14 and the starting winning (second starting winning) is The pending data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 8b) that has been generated but not yet started is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the game balls The number is a predetermined upper limit value, with numerical data indicating random number value MR1 for special image display result determination extracted from random number circuit 503 etc. by CPU 56 based on establishment and random number value MR2 for big hit type determination as pending data. Store until it reaches (eg "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game (special view display As a result, on-hold information is used to make it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is to be awarded based on the result.

  It should be noted that the game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S210 shown in FIG. 44, transmission setting of a starting opening winning combination designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning combination designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer, etc. In order to transmit, to 80, a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 8a is satisfied. Make settings for On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning combination designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. , Setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designated command notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 8b is established . The start opening winning combination designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is finished.

  After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 54 in the buffer area designated by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the number of first special view pending storages for the effect control board 80 A setting for transmitting either the first pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number is performed (step S212). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. Note that, instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying of the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  After the process of step S212 is performed, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S213; "1"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214), step S204. Go to the process of On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S213; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 13a and the second starting opening switch 14a simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S9101 of FIG. 43, the CPU 56 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S9110 to S9120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 55.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S9110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol is based on the presence / absence of the pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 151A or the second special view pending storage unit 151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the display device 8b. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b Small hit design, lost design either) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S 9111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determination of a variation pattern based on a result of prior determination of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Includes the process of determining one of a plurality of types. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It takes a value in the range of 251 ". When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of step S9110 and the variation pattern setting processing of step S9111, a variation pattern including the determined special symbol to be the variable display result of the special symbol and the variable symbol display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Processing for determining a variable display mode of

  The special symbol variation process of step S9112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation processing, processing for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation processing in step S9112 is executed, the first special symbol display device subtracts 1 from or adds 1 to the special figure variation timer value which is a stored value in the special view variation timer provided in the RAM 55 Regardless of whether it is a special drawing game using the first special drawing in 8a or a special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 8b, measurement of elapsed time is performed by a common timer. To be done. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of step S9112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 8a, and the second special feature in the second special symbol display device 8b. It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the figure is performed by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S9113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag provided in the RAM 55 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are both off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0". In addition, the special symbol stop process of step S9113 includes the process of performing the determination of the end of the time saving state, and performing the setting to transmit the command notifying that effect to the side of the effect control board 80 when the process is ended. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub control board such as the effect control board 80 in the above-described command control process).

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S9114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the variable display result becoming "big hit", etc., the process of performing the setting for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is in the open state may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, in response to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is in the open state is set to "29 seconds" and the number of big wins that is the upper limit number of times to execute a round By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, setting may be performed to set the normally open big hit state. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponds to "probable", and while setting the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is in the open state, to "0.1 seconds", the number of opening times of the winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting “15 times”, setting may be made to be a short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S9115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 21 for the special winning opening door etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is updated to "6". . In addition, the process during the big hit opening of step S9115 includes the process of setting to transmit the award ball command indicating that to the effect control board 80 in response to the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23 (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 80 in the command control process described above).

  The big hit opening post process of step S9116 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S9117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, the waiting time corresponding to the period when ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by the rendering device such as the image display device 9, the speaker 27, the gaming effect lamp 28, etc. It includes a process of waiting until it elapses and a process of performing various settings (start setting of a definite change state or a short cut state) for starting the probability change control or the time reduction control corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S9118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "probable". The setting for the small hit gaming state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the opening number of the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hit open processing of step S9119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, processing for stopping supply of a drive signal to the solenoid 21 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hitting end process of step S9120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". In this small hitting end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which a rendering operation informing the end of the small hitting gaming state is executed by a rendering device such as the image display device 9, the speaker 27, the gaming effect lamp 28, etc. Processing to wait up to is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9110 of FIG. 43 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 46, CPU 56 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 8b. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the RAM 55 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is other than “0” (step S231; No), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in second special view suspension storage unit 151B. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and numerical data which shows random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision are read out respectively (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Shifts pending data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers “2” to “4”) in section 151B by one entry at a time (Step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter in the RAM 55 may be updated so as to be decremented by one. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is "0" at step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special drawing holding memories is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 8a. For example, in the process of step S235, the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter may be read from the RAM 55, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to the one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if it can be determined.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than “0” (step S235; No), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in first special view suspension storage unit 151A. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and numerical data which show random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision are read out respectively (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the first pending memory number count value, and so on. The unit 151A shifts the hold data indicating the random number MR1 and MR2 stored in the lower order entries (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") higher than the hold number "1" by one entry at a time. (Step S237). In addition, in the process of step S 237, the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter in the RAM 55 may be updated so as to be decremented by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S234 and S238, it is changed as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "losing" A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S239). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 47A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 47B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 56 may select the special-image display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, before the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a, the variable display result Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the "big hit" or to control the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as the "small hit". It is a table that is referenced to make decisions. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, before the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b, the variable display result Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state with "big hit", and to control to the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as "small hit". It is a table that is referenced to make decisions.

  In the first special view display result determination table 130A, the special view is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the positive change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the second special view display result determination table 130B, disturbance for special view display result determination depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state (low probability state) or a positive change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "loss".

  In the first special view display result determination table 130A and the second special view display result determination table 130B, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination It is the data for determination allocated to the determination result of whether to control to a big hit game state as "." In each of the first special view display result determination table 130A and the second special view display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state), it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) More decision values than at times are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is a "big hit" as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) The probability of being determined to control the state is high. That is, in each of the first special view display result determination table 130A and the second special view display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a definite variation state, it is compared with a normal state or a time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state so that the probability to be determined to control to the big hit gaming state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. In the case where the variable display result is determined based on such a setting that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a is satisfied, In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special drawing game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b, the special drawing display result is The proportion determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" can be made different.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting gaming state as "small hitting", so for example, time saving state (low probability high base state) In the game state where the game ball is easy to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 14 such as the state (high probability high base state), frequent occurrence of small hit gaming state where obtaining the winning ball is difficult It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. In the second special view display result determination table 130B as well, a determination value of a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special view display result determination table 130A is allocated to the special view display result of “small hit”. It is also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value may be allocated to the "small hit" special figure display result as compared to the first special figure display result determination table 130A. In this way, even in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability changing state, the proportion determined to control the small hitting gaming state is lower than in the low base state such as the normal state or the time saving none definite changing state. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, determination of the special view display result may be performed with reference to the common special view display result determination table.

  Subsequent to the process of step S239 shown in FIG. 46, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is displayed as "big hit", "small hit" or "lost" In comparison with the determination value assigned to the special view display result, it is determined whether the special view display result is to be "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" (step S240).

  Since table data for special figure display result determination corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S239, in the process of step S240, the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is in a state of probability change Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "big hit" using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display such as the special view game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the case of the normal state or the short time state is selected as the data for normal determination, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display such as the special view game is started is in the probability change state, the game state is the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the case of the definite variation state is selected as the data for special determination, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this.

  After the special view display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (step S241). When it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 55 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 48 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243).

  The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". Is a table to be referenced. In the big hit classification determination table 131, whether the special symbol for which variable display (variation) has been performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (special figure game by the first special symbol display device 8a) or the second special figure (the second special figure Depending on whether it is a special design game by the special symbol display device 8b, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determination of the jackpot type is plural such as "non-probability change", "probability change", "probability" It is assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, the assignment of the decision value to the jackpot type of “R” is different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, while the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable", the variation special figure is Is the second special view, the determination value is not assigned to the "probable" jackpot type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a. And if the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable" can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type as "probable" to the short-term open jackpot state as "probable", so for example, normally variable winning ball device by high open control accompanying time saving control. In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening formed by 14, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game by avoiding frequent occurrences of short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls. .

  In addition, even when the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing, even if the determined value of the predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing is allocated to the jackpot type of “probable” Good. For example, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the "big deal" jackpot type than when the variation special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, determination of the jackpot type may be performed with reference to common table data.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S 243 shown in FIG. 46, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR 2 stored in the variation random number buffer is “non-probability”, “ Whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types is determined according to which one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability change” and “probability” matches (step S244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S244, any gaming state of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time-saving state, the probability change state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state, any gaming state It is determined before the finalized special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the jackpot type determined is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 55 (step S245). As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, if “probability change”, “1”, and if “probability”, “2” may be set.

  If it is determined in step S241 that "big hit" is not made (step S241; No), it is determined whether the special map display result is "small hit" (step S246). When it is determined that the "small hit" (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 55 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not a "small hit" (step S246; No) or after executing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state A finalized special symbol is set corresponding to the result of the prior decision of the decision and the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state (step S248). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not "small hit" in step S246, the special figure display result is "loss" in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the "loss" is made. A special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S246 that the special view display result is "small hit", the small hit corresponding to the pre-decision result indicating that the special view display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number of "2" to be the symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step S241 that the special view display result is "big hit", then "3", "5", "7" become the big hit symbol according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Set one of the special symbols that indicate the number of "" to the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability", a special symbol indicating the number of "3" that is usually a big hit symbol among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the determined special symbol. In addition, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probable change", a special symbol indicating the number of "7" which becomes a probability variation big hit symbol among the normally open round big hit symbols is set as the determined special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "probable", a special symbol indicating the number of "5" that will be a short-term open jackpot symbol is set as the finalized special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in step S248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; Yes), after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 9, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 80 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S 9111 of FIG. 43 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 56 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 50A is selected as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of types. It sets (step S262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the RAM 55, it is specified whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change” or “probability” (step S263).

  When it is determined (predetermined) that the special pattern display result is "big hit", the big hit variation pattern determination table 132A changes the variation pattern to a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the big hit type. It is a table referred to determine based on one of a plurality of types. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A, the numerical value (decision (decision) to be compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “probability” Value) is assigned to any of fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3.

  In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A, there is a portion where a determined value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs according to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. . For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probability variation”, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PB4-1, and the variation pattern PB4-2 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation pattern can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the plural types the jackpot type is to be made.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern determination table 132A, there is a portion where a decision value is assigned to different variation patterns depending on which of a plurality of types of big hit types are determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", while the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PB4-1, and the variation pattern PB4-2, No determined value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable", while the determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1-fluctuation pattern PC1-3, fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4 No determination value is assigned to -1 and the fluctuation pattern PB4-2. Thus, when the special view display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to the "probability", the fluctuation pattern different from the case where it is controlled to the normal open big hit state is determined. be able to.

  In addition, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time saving state when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of game states it is. In addition, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time saving state when the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “probability”. Thus, the decision values may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. Thereby, different fluctuation patterns can be determined according to which of the plurality of types of game states. In this embodiment, more decision values are assigned to variation pattern PA4-1 indicating a variation pattern of normal reach when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" than in the case of "probability variation". . Therefore, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the probability of becoming "certain change" is higher than the jackpot type becomes "non-certain change", so that the player can be expected to have an expectation, and the game It can improve the interest. Further, in the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 50A, fluctuation pattern PB4-2 for performing reach effect for super reach B is larger than fluctuation pattern PB4-1 for performing reach effect for super reach A. The decision value of is assigned.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 shown in FIG. 49 (step S261; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S264). Then, if the small hit flag is on (step S 264; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table 132 B shown in FIG. 50B is selected as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern to any of a plurality of types. And set (step S265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S 264 (step S 264; No), the lost change pattern determination table 132 C shown in FIG. 50C is used as a use table for determining the change pattern to any one of a plurality of types. It selects and sets (step S267). For example, by determining whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 55 is on or not, it is specified whether or not the time saving control in which the game state is the definite variation state or the time saving state is being performed (step S268). ).

  If it is determined (predetermined) that the special pattern display result is "loss", the change pattern determination table 132C causes the change pattern to be selected based on the random value MR3 for change pattern determination, and any one of a plurality of types. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not.

  In the lost fluctuation pattern determination table 132C, the determination value is changed so that the ratio determined for each fluctuation pattern is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state or the time reduction state in the time reduction control. There is a part assigned to the pattern. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined to the same fluctuation pattern different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, there is a portion where a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a definite variation state or a time reduction state in time reduction state. Thereby, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. In addition, in the lost fluctuation pattern determination table 132C, in comparison with the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 132A in FIG. Values are assigned to non-reach variation patterns. Therefore, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the expectation of becoming a big hit is high. Moreover, in the lost change pattern determination table 132C, the reach effect of the super reach B is more than the change pattern PB2-1 performing the reach effect of the super reach A, in contrast to the big hit change pattern determination table 132A of FIG. The determination value is assigned such that the variation pattern PB2-2 for performing. Therefore, the super reach B has a higher expectation of becoming a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super reach A. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the type of reach effect to be executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  After performing any of the processes in steps S263, S265, and S268 shown in FIG. 49, for example, based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like, the use table is used. The variation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in (step S269). Here, in the process of step S269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game executed using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 8a is determined based on the satisfaction of the first start condition. Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game to be executed by the second special symbol display device 8b using the second special figure based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, A common processing module can determine one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating a common random number value MR3 used to determine fluctuation patterns to be updated by a common random counter or the like.

  When the jackpot flag is on, the table data corresponding to the jackpot type specified by the process of step S263 is selected from the table data constituting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A, and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination It is only necessary to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the decision value corresponding to the numerical data indicating. In this way, the CPU 56 only needs to be able to determine one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of making the special view display result “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is only necessary to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 132B to determine the variation pattern to which the determination value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Thus, the CPU 56 only needs to determine the fluctuation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of making the special drawing display result “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step S269 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is to be the reach state when the variable display result is "loss".

  After the variation pattern is determined in step S269, a special figure variation time which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S270). Special figure fluctuation time that is the variable display time of the special symbol, from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time it is derived derived display of the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result (special figure display result) It is.

  After executing the processing of step S270, according to the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 8a, and the second special in the second special symbol display device 8b. In order to start any one of the special drawing games using the figures, setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (step S271). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 8a is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 8b is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands used for the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S272). For example, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 56 transmits a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Transmission of setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 54 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance, provided in the RAM 55, in order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first pending storage number notification command It is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 56 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. In the buffer area.

  Here, the first variation start command is a command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 8a. The second variation start command is a command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 8b. The fluctuation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R in the image display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Is a variation pattern specification command for specifying a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The gaming state designation command is a command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Each time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed based on the command transmission setting in step S272, the main board 31 transmits a game state designating command to the effect control board 80, The fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is first transmitted, the first change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern specification command The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process executed in step S9113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 56 first determines, for example, whether the special view final display flag provided in the RAM 55 is on (step S291). Here, the special view final display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S 295 described later, in response to the final display of the final special symbol which is the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the special figure finalization display flag is off at step S291 (step S291; No), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S293). In addition, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) predetermined as the special view determination display time is set (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the special view determination display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 55. Then, after setting the special figure finalization display flag to the on state (step S 295), the special symbol stop process is ended. Thus, after the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed in the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special view finalization display time set in step S294 elapses. Every time the stop processing is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the flag indicating that the special map final display is on is on.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is on (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value which is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read and it is determined whether the timer value becomes "0". In accordance with this, it may be determined whether or not the special view determination display time has elapsed. In addition, if the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special figure determination display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure determination display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after the special figure determination display flag is cleared and turned off (step S297), whether the big hit flag is on or not is determined. It determines (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a fixed time predetermined as the big hit start effect waiting time is set (step S299). Further, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S9300). For example, in the process of step S9300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command according to the big hit type buffer value is a send command in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Following the processing of step S9300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S9301). Further, the setting for ending the definite change state or the short time state is performed (step S9302). For example, as the process of step S9302, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time saving flag and turning it off, a process of clearing the time saving counter for counting the number of remaining times of the special figure game executed during the high base, etc. Should be performed. Then, after the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S9303), the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S9304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S9304; Yes), a predetermined time predetermined as the small hit start effect waiting time is set (step S9305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special view display result being “small hit” from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S9306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared to turn off (step S9307). Further, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S9308).

  If the small hit flag is off at step S9304 (step S9304; No), the special process process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S9309). After executing any of the processes in steps S9308 and S9309, it is determined whether or not the time saving control or the high release control in the high base is to be ended (step S9311), and the process is ended (step S9311). Yes), the time saving control, the high opening control, and the like are ended, and the setting to transmit the time shortening end command indicating the end of the time saving state is performed (step S9312), and the special symbol stopping process is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S9311; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S9311, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving count value which is the stored value of the time saving counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether the updated time reduction count value matches the predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if the time saving end determination value is met, the time saving control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning off. On the other hand, if the time saving end determination value is not matched, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop process may be finished. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is a probability change state, if the time saving flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is ended, and the time saving control may be ended based on the determination result of ending. Thus, while the time reduction control is ended, the probability change control may be continued until the next variable display result is “big hit” or until a predetermined number of special drawing games are executed. Thereby, the gaming state can be in the latent certainty changing state. Note that, with regard to a definite change state in which the short time flag is on and the positive change flag is on, the short time control is continued until the next variable display result is "big hit".

  Further, in the process of step S9311, for example, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the end of the probability change control is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 55, and the probability change control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended, for example, when the number of times the special figure game is executed during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value or the like. On the other hand, in the process of step S9311, the process for ending the probability change control may not be executed, and the probability change control may be continued until the next variable display result is "big hit".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 80 will be described.
In the effect control board 80, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 112, set various initial values, and set CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 80). Perform register setting etc. of the circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 31 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 114, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77. Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 112. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, for example, the operation of displaying the effect image in the display area of the image display device 9, the operation of outputting voice from the speaker 27, the operation of lighting the decorative light such as the game effect lamp 28 and the decorative LED The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the operation, is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 31.

  Subsequent to the effect control process, the effect random number updating process is executed, and software is used to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 112 as various random number values used for effect control.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 101 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S9170 to S9177 as follows according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 112 or the like. Do.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S9170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. Whether or not the variable display start waiting process starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 9 based on whether or not the first change start command or the second change start command from the main substrate 31 is received or not. And the like.

  The variable display start setting process in step S9171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol in the image display device 9 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b. In order to perform the variable display execution setting and various other rendering operations, it includes a process of determining a finalized decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. . Further, the variable display start setting process includes a process for performing an operation effect setting process described later.

  The variable display effect process of step S9172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the CPU for effect control 101 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 112, and performs various types during variable display of the decorative symbol. Perform effect control of. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, a suggestion effect or a switching indication effect is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern, or that the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 31 is received. Corresponding to the etc., the finalized stop design is displayed as the final stop design, which is the result of the variable display of the decorative design. If the finalized display of the finalized decorative symbol is displayed in response to the end code being read out from the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is displayed. When it has elapsed, the decorative display can be derived and displayed autonomously on the side of the effect control board 80 without the effect control command from the main board 31 and the variable display result can be confirmed. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S9173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting processing per special drawing, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 31 has been received. Then, when the hit start designating command designates the start of the big hit gaming state when the hit start designating command is received, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit during the presentation processing “6”. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect processing. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", and the value of the effect process flag is an initial value. Update to "0". In addition, the processing to wait for special figure per step S9173 includes the processing to perform the execution setting of the above-mentioned jackpot promotion effect when the jack start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state excluding “probable”. ing.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S9174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hitting medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 101 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 9 And outputting voice and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 70, and outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 35 to the game effect lamp 28 or decoration It performs various effect control in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED. Furthermore, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 31, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect. .

  The small hitting end effect process of step S9175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 101 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 9 And outputting voice and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 70, and outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 35 to the game effect lamp 28 or decoration Various effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED for an LED, is executed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S9176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit, during the effect processing, the CPU for effect control 101 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 9 Or, outputting voice and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 70, and outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 35 Execute various effect control in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, control for executing a jackpot middle promotion effect or notification effect is performed. Further, in the big hit internal effect processing, for example, in response to the hit end designation command from the main substrate 31 being received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process of step S9177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 9 or By outputting voice and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 70, and outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 35, the game effect lamp 28 and decorative LED The various effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing, is executed.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9171 of FIG. 52 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 101 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 31, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S551). When it is determined that the special view display result is "lost" (step S551; Yes), for example, the fluctuation pattern designated by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from main substrate 31 or the like. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" (step S552).

  If it is determined in step S552 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S553). As an example, in the process of step S553, first, numerical data indicating a random value for left fixed symbol determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in RAM 112 is extracted, and a predetermined left fixed previously stored in ROM 111 or the like By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 9L in the display area of the image display device 9 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 112 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 111 or the like is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 9R in the display area of the image display device 9 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 112 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 111 or the like is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 9C in the display area of the image display device 9 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), a combination of finalized design symbols to be a final stop design constituting a reach combination is determined (step S554). As an example, in the process of step S554, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in RAM 112, is extracted and predetermined left and right fixed previously stored in ROM 111 or the like By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the symbol numbers of the fixed ornament symbols displayed on the left and the right in the symbol display areas 9L and 9R in the display region of the image display device 9 are the same. Determine the decoration pattern of. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 112 and referring to a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 111 or the like The finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the "in" decorative symbol display area 9C in the display area of the image display device 9 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S551 that the special view display result is not "loss" (step S551; No), it is determined whether the special view display result is "small hit" or "probable" (step S555) ). When it is determined to be "small hit" or "probable" (step S555; Yes), for example, the final stop design corresponding to the "small hit" or "probable", such as an opening chance eye A combination is determined (step S557). As an example, in response to the case where one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting any one of a plurality of opening chances is determined Determine the combination of decorative designs. In this case, numerical data representing a random number value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 112 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 111 or the like is referred to Thus, it is sufficient to determine the combination of the finalized decorative symbols that constitute any of the opening chance eyes.

  If it is determined in step S525 that "non-probability" or "probability" other than "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the combination of the finalized design that constitutes the big hit combination is determined (Step S556). As an example, in the process of step S556, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit determined by the random counter of the RAM 112 or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined big hit determined symbol stored in advance in the ROM 111 or the like By referring to the decision table, etc., the symbol numbers of the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R are all displayed on the screen of the image display device 9 in the same stop. Determine the decoration pattern.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, in the process of step S556, any one of a plurality of normal symbols or odd-change symbols is displayed It should be selected and decided on a finalized decorative symbol that constitutes a big hit combination.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S553, S554, and S556, an operation effect setting process is performed to determine whether or not to perform the operation effect (step S559). The operation effect in this embodiment is an effect to be performed during a period from immediately after the start of the variable display until reaching the reach state (including when the reach state is not reached), and a display for prompting the player to operate the push button 120 (operation This is an effect of performing promotion display) and notifying of the jackpot expectation degree in response to the operation of the push button 120 by the player (see FIG. 56). Specifically, in the operation effect in this embodiment, an image of the push button 120 is displayed as an operation promotion display, and an effective period (for example, 8) allowing the player to receive an operation (for example, a continuous hitting operation) of the push button 120. Display the meter that shows the second) (Display the effective period). The term of validity is such that the player can recognize the remaining term of validity by decreasing and displaying the meter as a quantitative indication with the passage of time (ie, the term of validity indication is a quantitative indication). The meter display is included, and the meter amount indicates the remaining amount of the effective period). Further, in the operation effect in this embodiment, the operation prompting display and the effective period display displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect are displayed so as to increase with time. More specifically, the image of the push button 120 as the operation prompting display is displayed so as to gradually increase with time, and the size of the meter as the effective period display is also displayed (quantitatively As the meter as the display becomes larger, the effective period display becomes larger). In addition, since the effective period decreases with the passage of time, in the operation effect, while the size of the meter as the effective period display increases, the reduction amount of the meter increases. This indicates a fixed validity period (8 seconds). Then, after the end of the effective period, the jackpot anticipation degree is notified according to the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 by the player, and the operation effect is ended. In addition, the operation promotion display (it is small display immediately after the start) displayed immediately after the operation production start is called the first promotion display, and the effective period display of the size corresponding to the first promotion display (more specifically, the meter display) ) Shall be referred to as the first quantitative indication. In addition, the operation prompting display displayed immediately before the end of the effective period (large display immediately before the end) is called the second prompting, and the effective period display of the size corresponding to the second prompting (specifically, the meter display) Is called the second quantitative indication. The quantitative display may be any display as long as the player can specify the effective period, and includes the display of the first mode corresponding to the first operation promotion display and the display of the second mode corresponding to the second promotion display. It may be a display. For example, in addition to the meter display in which the amount of meter decreases as described above, the quantitative display may be one in which the color of the meter changes, one in which the amount of memory changes, a balloon is deflated, or ice is melted It may be a display according to the contents of the effect to be executed, such as the one to be performed. Also, for example, when a pattern of decreasing meter amount is executed as the first quantitative display corresponding to the first operation prompting display, a pattern of ice melting as the second quantitative display corresponding to the second operation prompting The display of a different concept may be applied depending on the mode of the operation promotion display (which may be the pattern of the operation effect), such as executing the above. In addition, about what the amount of memory changes, it is enlarged at a stretch (for example, 2 times) from the normal size to the size (large size) larger than the normal, and the normal size decreases by 1 memory, but the large size May be reduced by two memories, etc., as the first quantitative indication and the second quantitative indication. Also, in the case of a pattern in which the balloon is squeezed or the ice is melted, the color of the balloon or ice may be changed when changing from the normal size to a size larger than normal. Also, the shape of the ice may be changed.

  In the operation effect setting process of step S559, with reference to the operation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 54, the presence or absence and the type (pattern) of execution of the operation effect are determined. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a predetermined effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to "no execution" indicating that no operation effect is to be performed, other types of operation effects such as "pattern A", "pattern B" and "pattern C" are set. . In the process of step S559 in FIG. 53, when it is determined to execute the operation effect, the execution period of the operation effect (operation effect period) and the effective period during which the player can accept the operation are also set. .

  The patterns A to C are set as operation effects in different modes. In each of the patterns A to C, as shown in FIG. 56, an image for climbing a mountain road is displayed, and the effect of prompting an operation on the push button 120 is shown. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, “pattern A” corresponds to the character, the button display 66 as the operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display while the character climbs the mountain path. The effective period display 88 of the size (meter display) is an operation effect of a pattern which becomes visible continuously during the operation effect period. Similarly, in “pattern B”, an image that climbs a mountain path is displayed, but an image in a range viewed from the eyes of the character is displayed. Specifically, at the start of the operation effect, although the entire mountain road is displayed as shown in FIG. 56A (the character is not displayed), the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are up to the corner X shown in FIG. This is an operation effect of a pattern in which the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can be visually recognized when the user can not visually recognize and turns the corner X. That is, in the “pattern B”, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become visible at the start of the operation effect, but after the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become invisible in the middle period, This is an operation effect of a pattern in which the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can be visually recognized again. Note that, as described above, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are displayed gradually larger with the lapse of time, so when it becomes invisible again after becoming invisible once, it becomes more visible than when the operation effect is started. The button display 66 and the effective period display 88 will be displayed larger again. In "Pattern C", an image of climbing a mountain path is displayed in the same manner as "Pattern B", and an image of a range visible from the eyes of the character is displayed. While the display 66 and the effective period display 88 can not be visually recognized, in the “pattern C”, the effective period display 88 is separately displayed (specifically, the upper left side for the player of the image display device 9, etc.) This is an operation effect of a pattern that is displayed gradually larger (it is sufficient if the effective period display 88 is displayed at the original position after bending the corner X). That is, after the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become visible at the start of the operation effect, “pattern C” becomes invisible in the intermediate period, and the effective period display 88 is separately displayed. It is an operation effect of a pattern which is displayed and thereafter the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can be visually recognized again. The type and pattern of the operation effects are not limited to these, and each may be arbitrary, and a message may be displayed, or the pattern may be different. Also, the type of operation effect may be only one. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, in each of the patterns A to C, an example is shown in which an image climbing a mountain path is displayed, but different images may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the operation effect execution determination table in this embodiment, it is set such that the possibility of becoming a super reach or a big hit is higher in the case where the operation effect is performed than in the case where the operation effect is not performed. ing. In addition, when the operation effect is executed, the pattern B is set to be more likely to be a big hit than the pattern B, and the pattern C is likely to be a big hit (a big hit reliability). There is. Therefore, it is possible to draw the attention of the player as to whether or not the operation effect is executed, and the type of the operation effect when it is executed. In addition, it is not necessary to determine the execution presence / absence and the type of the operation presentation at once as described above, and it may be configured to separately determine the execution presence / absence and the type of the operation presentation. In addition, when the variation pattern of the specific big hit is determined, the operation effect of the particular pattern may be performed without fail, so that there may be the operation effect of the pattern that becomes the big hit determination. For example, the operation presentation in this embodiment is such that the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation presentation as described above, and then the second promotion display and the second quantitative display are respectively performed. Although an example is shown in which the operation effect is ended by being enlarged, for example, the second promotion display and the second quantitative display may be displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect, and there may be an operation effect of the pattern ended as it is. In the case, the jackpot may be finalized.

  Further, in the operation effect in this embodiment, as described above, the big hit expectation is notified in response to the operation of the push button 120 by the player. Specifically, the effective period starts with the start of the operation effect, and gradually increases in the right portion of the image display device 9 of FIG. 56 corresponding to the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 during the effective period. With the end (that is, the end of the operation effect), the expectation meter 99 is determined to notify the jackpot expectation. Incidentally, in the operation rendition in this embodiment, until the end of the effective period (that is, the end of the operation rendition), the expectation degree meter 99 is increased only to the "middle" portion of the expectation degree meter 99 in FIG. At the end of the effective period, the meter amount is increased or decreased to either "large" or "small" and determined, or the meter amount is determined as "medium". That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which degree of expectation is achieved until the end of the effective period. As described above, when the operation effect is executed, the possibility that the pattern C will be a big hit will be higher in the pattern C than in the pattern B than in the pattern A (big hit reliability) Is set as. Therefore, in pattern B, pattern C has a higher rate of increase in meter amount to "large" at the end of the effective period than in pattern A (decreases to "small". The proportion is the reverse). In this embodiment, the increase amount of the expectation meter 99 according to one operation in the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 is common regardless of the pattern, but for example, the increase amount as the jackpot expectation degree is higher May be smaller or vice versa. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase amount of the expectation meter 99 according to the operation. In addition, you may decide according to the process of step S559 of FIG. 53 whether the meter amount of the expectation degree meter 99 is decided to either "large", "medium", or "small" may be determined, or the operation effect When it is determined to execute, it may be determined separately according to the variable display result.

  Returning to FIG. 53, after executing the processing of step S559 or after executing the processing of step S557, the CPU for effect control 101 selects an effect control pattern to be used patterns from among a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. (Step S560). For example, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of effect control patterns stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 111 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Good. Subsequently, for example, in response to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 112 is set (step S561).

  Then, setting is made to start the change of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 9 (step S562). At this time, for example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S 560 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 109 or the like, and the like. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R provided in the display region of the above. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S563), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S9172 of FIG. When variable-displayed effect processing shown in FIG. 55 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step S9801). For example, the effect control CPU 101 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the timer value of the effect control process timer, and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value after the update It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S9801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S9801; No), the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not it is an operation effect period (step S9804). When it is determined in the process of step S559 in FIG. 53 that the operation effect period is to be performed in the process of step S559, it may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined according to the operation effect. The start of the operation effect period is determined immediately after the start of the variable display (for example, after several seconds).

  When it is determined that it is the operation effect period (step S9804; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control of the operation effect (step S9805). Thereby, one of the operation effects of the patterns A to C is executed. In the process of step S9805, as described above, the expectation meter 99 gradually increases in accordance with the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 by the player during the effective period, and the effective period ends (that is, the end of the operation effect) When the meter amount of the expectation meter 99 is determined in accordance with), a process of notifying the jackpot expectation is also performed. Further, in the process of step S9805, the first prompting display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect according to the pattern to be executed, and then each is enlarged to the second prompting display and the second quantitative display. A process of displaying the operation effect may be performed (in the case of “pattern C”, a process of separately displaying the effective period display 88 as described above may also be performed). After executing the processing of step S9805 or when it is determined in step S9804 that it is not an operation effect period (step S9804; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 101 is a reach effect period for executing reach effect Is determined (step S9806). The reach effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that it is a reach effect period (step S9806; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs control for executing reach effect, such as displaying a background image for reach effect (step S9807).

  After execution of the process of step S 9807 or when it is determined in step S 9806 that it is not a reach effect period (step S 9806; No), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step S 9808), and the variable display effect processing is finished.

  If it is determined in step S9801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S9801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 31 has been received (step S9809). At this time, if the symbol determination command is not received (step S 9809; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits.

  If the symbol determination command is received in step S 9809 (step S 9809; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs decoration such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to, for example, VDP of the display control unit 109. Control is performed so as to derive and display a final stop symbol (decided decoration symbol) to be a display result in variable display of symbols (step S9810). Subsequently, a fixed time predetermined as the jackpot start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S9811). Next, the CPU for effect control 101 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the special process waiting processing per step (step S9812), and ends the variable display effect process.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when the operation effect of pattern A is executed. FIG. 56A shows an example of the effect operation immediately after the operation effect is started, and as shown in the figure, a button display 66 as an operation prompting display and an effective period display 88 as an effective period display are displayed. . In addition, since the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 shown in FIG. 56A are immediately after the start of the operation effect, they correspond to the first promotion display and the first quantitative display, respectively. In addition, since it is immediately after the start of the operation effect, the meter of the expectation degree meter 99 on the right side of the image display device 9 is not increased. FIG. 56 (B) shows a state after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 3 seconds) from the start of the operation effect (from the state of FIG. 56 (A)), and as shown, the displayed character Indicates that the vehicle has advanced to the corner X point. As shown in FIG. 56 (B), as time passes from the state shown in FIG. 56 (A), the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are enlarged and displayed. Moreover, according to this, the reduction amount of the meter which shows the residual amount of the effective period is large. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), the image display device corresponds to the player's continuous hitting operation performed from the state shown in FIG. 56 (A) to the state shown in FIG. 56 (B). The meter of the expectation meter 99 on the right side of 9 shows an example in which the amount shown is increased. Thereafter, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are further enlarged to display the second prompting display and the second quantitative display, and the effective period ends, that is, the operation effect ends and the meter amount of the expectation meter 99 Determined as "Large", "Medium", or "Small". When the operation effects of pattern B and pattern C are executed, the character is not displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect, as compared with the example shown in FIG. The same display is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), in the operation effect of pattern B, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can not be visually recognized in the period until the state advances to the corner X point. Although the button display 66 can not be viewed, the effective period display 88 is enlarged and displayed separately as time passes. Then, when the vehicle has advanced to the corner X point, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are enlarged and displayed in both the pattern B and the pattern C (in the case of the pattern C, the effective period display at the original position) 88 will be enlarged).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  The effect control CPU 101 displays the first prompting display as an operation prompting display (it is a small display immediately after the start) immediately after the start of the operation effect, and displays the effective period of the size corresponding to the first prompting (more specific The meter display is displayed as a first quantitative display, and the operation prompting display and the effective period display are displayed to be gradually enlarged as time passes. Further, by gradually increasing the decrease amount of the meter as the effective period display with the passage of time, control is performed so as to become a constant effective period. Therefore, since the effective period display 88 corresponding to the size of the button display 66 is displayed, display control of the effective period according to the operation prompting display can be accurately performed.

  Further, after displaying the first promotion display and the first quantitative display immediately after the start of the operation production, the effect control CPU 101 enlarges and displays the size of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display with the passage of time. Therefore, the operation prompting display and the effective period display can be emphasized. In addition, after enlarging and displaying the size of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display with the passage of time, the enlargement display is ended, and the operation promotion display and the effective period display are emphasized to end the operation effect. Can.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays the meter as an effective period display, and enlarges and displays the size of the meter as time passes. Also, along with that, in order to display a certain effective period, increase the decrease amount of the meter. That is, the decrease rate is made faster in accordance with the increase in the size of the meter. Therefore, display control of the effective period according to the operation prompting display can be accurately performed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one of the embodiments described above can solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a configuration of part. Further, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation production, and then each is enlarged and displayed in an aspect such as the second promotion display and the second quantitative display, and the operation production ends Although an example is shown, after the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect, the pattern in which the operation effect ends without changing the mode as it is, or the second promotion immediately after the operation effect starts The display and the second quantitative display may be displayed, and there may be a pattern in which the operation effect ends. In addition, immediately after the start of the operation effect, the second promotion display and the second quantitative display are displayed, and then there is a pattern in which the respective reduction display is performed and the operation effect is finished in the modes such as the first promotion display and the first quantitative display. It is also good. That is, with the start of the operation effect, any one of the first promotion display and the first quantitative display and the second promotion display and the second quantitative display may be displayed, and then the display size does not change. There may be cases. Then, the degree of expectation may be different according to the pattern (the degree of expectation may be higher as the display is finally larger). Furthermore, after the first prompting display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation effect, each of the patterns is enlarged and displayed in an aspect such as the second prompting display and the second quantitative display, and the operation effect is ended. Even if, for example, the first prompting display and the first quantitative display are displayed in addition to the pattern for starting the enlarged display immediately after the first prompting display and the first quantitative display are displayed, the enlargement is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. There may be patterns such as different patterns of timing and speed at which to start enlargement. According to this, when the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are ended with the display being finished, the enlarged display is performed while appearing to the player, so that the player does not think only to perform the button operation during the effective period. Also, it is possible to pay attention to the change mode such as the promotion display during the effective period, and it is possible to improve the rendering effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation effect, the button display 66 as the operation prompting display and the effective period display 88 are displayed by displaying the image ascending the mountain path (by making the character appear to approach). (Meter Display) Although an example is shown in which the display is gradually enlarged as time passes, this is an example. For example, as the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 themselves approach the player as time goes by (from the back side to the front side for the player of the image display device 9), they are displayed gradually gradually as time goes by. You may do so. Also with such a configuration, display control of the effective period display according to the operation prompting display can be accurately performed. Also in this case, if the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation production, and then each is enlargedly displayed in a mode such as the second promotion display and the second quantitative display, and the operation production is ended. Good. Note that although the operation effect may end immediately after enlarged display of each of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display, each of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display is enlarged and displayed. After that, the enlarged display may be stopped for a predetermined period (e.g., a period until the remaining amount of the effective period is exhausted). That is, after being enlarged to the size of the second prompting display and the second quantitative display, the size of the second prompting display and the second quantitative display is stopped so that the enlargement is stopped until the remaining effective period ends. It may be enlarged so that the remaining amount of the effective period still exists. Note that the first promotion display and the first quantitative display are displayed immediately after the start of the operation production, and then each is enlarged and displayed in the form of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display, for example, When the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 themselves approach the player with time, they may be expanded beyond the sizes of the second promotion display and the second quantitative display described above. Specifically, the image display device 9 is enlarged and displayed until the size of the image display device 9 is full, and then it is further enlarged and displayed, and the operation effect is ended by fading out from the image display device 9 You may do so. Also, for example, at the start of the promotion display, characters such as "chance" are displayed in small letters on the promotion display, and characters such as "chance" are easily visible by displaying the promotion display over time. It may be

  In the above embodiment, in the operation effect of “pattern B”, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become visible at the start of the operation effect, but the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 appear in the middle period Although an example in which the button display 66 and the valid period display 88 become visible again after being disabled is shown, for example, the button display 66 and the valid period display 88 can be partially visible even if it becomes not visible. You may make it (it is good also as one part visual recognition of the effective period display 88). Similarly, in the operation effect of “pattern C”, the effective period display 88 may be separately displayed and part of the button display 66 may be visible. In addition, while the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can not be visually recognized in the middle of the “pattern B”, the effective period display 88 is separately displayed for the “pattern C”. Good. According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a period in which the button operation is performed, that is, it is during the operation effect period.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation effect of “pattern B”, an image of the range viewed from the eyes of the character is displayed, so button display 66 and effective period display 88 up to the corner X shown in FIG. In this example, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become visible when the user turns the corner X, but this is an example (the same applies to the pattern C). In the operation effect of “pattern B”, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can be visually recognized at the start of the operation effect, but the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 can not be visually recognized in the middle period If the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 become visible again after that, other effects may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 57, it moves downward in the center of the upper part of the image display device 9 on the game board 6 (on the screen of the image display device 9, that is, in front of the screen of the image display device 9 as viewed from the player) It is possible to provide a star-shaped character 200 which can be configured (this character 200 can be moved to an effect position overlapping the center of the upper part of the image display device 9 as an initial position and overlapping a part of the display screen of the image display device 9) The button display 66 and the effective period display 88 may not be visible in the middle of the operation effect by moving the role object 200 from the initial position to the effect position. Then, after the accessory 200 returns to the initial position, that is, after the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is resolved, the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 are displayed on the image display device 9, and the button display 66 and the effective period display again It is good if 88 becomes visible. According to this, after the role product 200 returns from the rendering position to the initial position, that is, after the visual difficulty state of the effective period is resolved, the effective period ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the movable member operable and to prevent the player from overlooking the effective period. As shown in FIG. 57 (D), the button display 66 and the effective period display 88 may be configured so as not to be completely obscured even if the character 200 moves to the effect position (partial visual recognition May be possible). Further, when the role feature 200 moves to the effect position, the effective period display 88 may be separately displayed as in the operation effect of “pattern C”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the meter as the quantitative display is decreased with time and displayed as the effective period display, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the effective period in the effective period display In a portion other than the portion indicating the remaining amount of, the number of seconds (seconds display) of the remaining effective period may be displayed so that the player can recognize. In addition, in the operation effect, the operation prompting display and the effective period display are displayed so as to become larger as time passes, but along with this, the second number display may be enlarged and displayed (shown in FIG. 58A) After a predetermined time has elapsed from the state, it may be enlarged and displayed in the state shown in FIG. According to this, since the display of the remaining effective period is displayed larger as the effective period decreases, the effective period can be grasped more accurately.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the expectation meter 99 gradually increases in response to the player's continuous hit operation of the push button 120 during the effective period, and also along with the end of the effective period (that is, the end of the operation effect). Although the example which alert | reports big hit expectation degree is shown when the meter amount of the expectation degree meter 99 is decided, operation with respect to the push button 120 is not restricted to continuous hit operation, It may be long press operation. Further, for example, by holding for one second, a determination equivalent to the fact that the continuous hitting operation is being performed for one second may be performed (automatic continuous hitting). Then, for example, before the predetermined period elapses (e.g., before 4 seconds elapses) in the eight-second effective period, the determination of the automatic consecutive hit determination that the continuous hitting operation is performed by the long press operation is validated, and the predetermined period elapses After that, the determination of the automatic double hit may be invalidated (conversely, the determination of the automatic double hit may be invalidated before the predetermined period has elapsed and may be validated after the predetermined period has elapsed). According to this, it is possible to simplify the player's operation by the automatic double hit and to change the determination of the automatic double hit according to the situation, so it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the operation effect is performed during a period from immediately after the start of the variable display until the reach state (including the case where the reach state is not reached). It may be an effect to be performed. In this case, when the effective period display 88 is separately displayed in the operation effect of "pattern C" so as not to interfere with the reach effect, the display design is changed as a meter by transmitting the "left" decorative pattern that constitutes the reach state, The meter may decrease from the top to the bottom of the decorative pattern. In addition, it is not restricted to what changes the decorative pattern of "left" to a meter display, The decorative pattern of "right" may be changed to a meter display, and both of them may be sufficient. In this case, even with the same “pattern C” operation effect, the “right” decorative pattern is “left” and “right” rather than the “right” decorative pattern than the “left” decorative pattern. When both decorative symbols are changed to meter display, the rate at which the expectation meter 99 is determined to be "large" may be higher (that is, the expectation may be higher) ). According to this, it is possible to draw the attention of the player as to which decoration pattern is changed to the meter display. In addition, the operation effect may be executed as a probability change promotion effect that indicates the possibility of being controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state as an effect during the big hit, in this case, the expectation meter 99 is a probability change It may be anything that indicates the possibility of being controlled by the state.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 80 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern command is Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 80 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the fluctuation time or the fluctuation mode) after (2) stop. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 80, effect control in the fluctuation display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 80. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can also be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  In the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of a number indicating "0" to "9" or a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to numbers or symbols, etc. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b or the special symbol variably displayed is a number indicating "0" to "9" or a symbol indicating "-" It is not limited to what consists of etc. For example, the lighting pattern in the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, or a pattern in which all the lights are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, lost pattern) And the one that repeats alternately is also included in the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Also, the special symbol displayed during the variable display and the special symbol displayed as the variable display result may be different. As a variable display of the special symbol, for example, a display that blinks "-" is performed, and as a result of the variable display, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "lost", etc.) The display of) is also included in the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, blinking or scrolling display of one kind of decorative design is also included in the variable display of decorative design. The lighting pattern in the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, or a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern (for example, lost pattern) in which at least a part of the LEDs are lit. Repeating alternately is also included in the variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, the decorative pattern or the normal pattern displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative pattern or the normal pattern displayed as the variable display result.

  In the above embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio and the like, and the same applies to the probability) may include 0 percent. That is, the ratio or probability may be between 0 and 10 percent. For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and one ratio is, for example, 0%, the other ratio is 100%. And including. Further, the sum of the one ratio and the other ratio may not be 100% (some may not be included in either one or the other, and may have a predetermined ratio). In addition, in the case where the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, including the ratio of one at 0% and the ratio of the other at 10%. For example, in the above, to make the determination ratio of the variable display pattern in the specific period after the advantageous state different from the determination ratio of the variable display pattern in other than the specific period, the variable display pattern selected on the other side is selected. It also includes cases where the variable display pattern selected on one side and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 9 deviate from the spirit of the present invention. As long as it does not, it is possible to change and modify arbitrarily. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls in response to detection of winning balls, but encloses the gaming balls and responds to detection of winning balls. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that gives a score, or a gaming machine that controls to a big hit gaming state when passing through a specific passing gate. Furthermore, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value (such as medals), and a plurality of identification information that can be identified can be variably displayed. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving display results on the variable display device, and in which winning can be made according to the display results derived on the variable display device.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the one that performs the probability change control in which the big hit type is “probable change” when the big hit symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol. It may be a pachinko gaming machine of a probability variation determination device type in which probability variation control is performed based on the passage of the gaming ball through a specific area in the attacker provided in the.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Other Embodiments
Of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, all or part of the configuration may be arbitrarily combined. For example, the following gaming machines can be considered.

A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine),
First operation means (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, determination key for setting) operable by the player;
A second operation means (for example, an operation unit other than the push button 120 if the first operation means is the push button 120) operable by the player and different from the first operation means;
In the first aspect (for example, an aspect in which the button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38 (B) or the like) or in the second aspect (for example, an aspect that urges the player more strongly than the first aspect) Operation promotion display (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, effect display device 9, step S8125 in FIG. 34) for promoting the operation of the first operation means to the player in the mode that the button as shown is popping out 35. A step S8139A) of 35 and a quantitative display (for example, a meter display etc.) are variably displayed to display an effective period in which an operation on at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means can be received. Display control hand capable of displaying effective period display (for example, effective period display 88 etc. CPU 120 for effect control to execute operation effects etc.) And,
Effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the execution of the operation prompting display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, an effect display device 9) and,
The effect executing means is
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as valid determination (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), FIG. As shown in step S8128 and FIG. 38F, effects of the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif announcement effect image may be executed, or the character is the same but the movement is different. Even if it performs the production of the same kind of production mode such as the production showing that the character is talking the same meaning contents or the production of the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of the big hit expectation, etc. It is also possible to perform a related effect such as performing a premium effect for one operation and performing an associated non-premium effect for the other operation).
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, The same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). An effect of notifying that the operation is invalid may be performed.)
The display control means
The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting obtained by enlarging or reducing the first operation prompting can be displayed as the operation prompting display (for example, the first prompting to the second prompting can be displayed) Such),
A first pattern for variably displaying a first quantitative display of a size corresponding to the first operation prompting as the effective period display while performing the first operation prompting, and the second operation prompting And a second pattern for variably displaying a second quantitative display of a size corresponding to the second operation prompting as the effective period display (for example, a size corresponding to the first prompting) Display the effective period of the display and the effective period of the size corresponding to the second prompting etc.
The same effective period is displayed for the first pattern and the second pattern by differentiating the change mode of the first quantitative display and the second quantitative display (for example, in the meter as the effective period display) Increase the size while increasing the reduction of the meter to display a certain effective period, etc.

  According to such a configuration, whether or not to determine the validity differs depending on the operation means operated according to the mode of the operation promotion display. For this reason, the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation. Moreover, display control of the effective period according to the operation promotion display can be performed accurately.

  Specifically, when the display mode of the operation promotion display for prompting the user to continuously hit or hold the push button 120, which is the operation promotion target, is the first mode as shown in FIG. 38B, the push button 120, and Even if any of the other operation units (for example, the stick controller 122, the direction button for selection on the menu screen, and the determination button) is operated, the operation is validated and as shown in FIG. 56. , It is possible to change from the operation prompting display before the change displayed first to the operation prompting display after the change which has been enlarged or reduced, and the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display before the change, The same effective period may be displayed as the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display after change.

  In this way, regardless of whether the operation promotion target operation unit is operated or the other operation units are operated, the size of the operation promotion display is changed as compared with the case where the size is not changed. Can be enhanced by changing the size of the operation prompting display, so that the operation prompting target operation unit can be emphasized, so that the operation prompting of the operation prompting target operation unit can be more strongly urged. Even if the size of the operation promotion display changes, it is accurately indicated by the display of the effective period that the effective period has not changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the case where the operation prompting display is the first mode, when the push button 120 is continuously operated, as shown in FIG. 56, the size of the operation prompting display is changed while the size of the operation prompting display is changed. When the operation unit is continuously operated, the size of the operation prompting display may not be changed.

  In this way, the size of the operation promotion display changes when the operation promotion target operation unit is operated, but the size of the operation promotion display does not change when the other operation units are operated. The player can be motivated to change the size of the operation promotion display, and the operation of the operation unit as the operation promotion target can be strongly urged.

  In addition, in the case where the display mode of the operation promotion display for prompting continuous hitting and long pressing of the push button 120 which is the operation promotion target is the second mode as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the following may be performed. When an operation unit other than the push button 120 (for example, the stick controller 122, a direction button for selection on the menu screen or a determination button) is operated, the operation is not determined to be valid, and the operation is continuously performed. Even if it is done, the size of the operation prompting display is not changed. On the other hand, when the push button 120 is operated, the operation is validated, and as shown in FIG. 56, the operation promotion display after the change which has been enlarged or reduced from the operation promotion display before the change initially displayed is displayed. It is possible to change, and the same effective period is displayed by the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display before the change and the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display after the change.

  In this way, as compared to the case where the size of the operation promotion display is not changed, the interest can be improved by changing the size, and the operation of the operation unit other than the operation promotion target operation unit is performed. Since the size of the operation promotion display does not change even if it continues, it is possible to give the player a motivation to change the size of the operation promotion display, and urge the operation of the operation unit of the operation promotion target more strongly be able to.

  Note that even when the operation prompting display is in the second mode, when the operation unit other than the push button 120 is operated, the operation is not determined to be valid, but it is continuously operated. As indicated by 56, the size of the operation prompting display may be changed.

  In this way, regardless of whether the operation promoting target operation unit is operated or the other operation units are operated, the size is changed as compared with the case where the size of the operation promotion display is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest and enhance the operation promoting target operation unit by changing the size of the operation promoting display, so that the operation promoting target operation unit is more strongly urged. Can.

  In addition, when the operation unit targeted for operation promotion is operated, the timing of the change in the size of the operation promotion display may be made earlier than when the other operation units are operated, or the degree of the change. May be increased. Even in this case, the same effective period is displayed by the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display before the change and the effective period display of the size corresponding to the operation prompting display after the change.

  In this way, the player can be motivated to operate the operation unit that is the object of operation promotion rather than the operation of the other operation units, so the operation of the operation unit that is the operation promotion target can be more strongly urged In addition to the above, even if the size of the operation promotion display changes, it is accurately indicated by the display of the effective period that the effective period has not changed, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

  In the present invention, the first mode may be a first operation prompting display, and the second mode may be a second operation prompting display. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming machine frame, 6 gaming board, 8a 1st special symbol indicator, 8b 2nd special symbol indicator, 8a, 8b special symbol display device, 9 effect display device (image display device), 9c , 9d 4th symbol display area, 10 normal symbol display, 13 1st start winning opening (normal winning ball device), 14 2nd starting winning opening (normal variable winning ball device), 13a, 14a starting opening switch, 18c combined Hold storage display unit, 20 special variable winning ball device, 23 count switch, 27 speaker, 28 game effect lamp, 31 game control board (main board), 32a gate switch, 35 lamp control board, 56 CPU, 560 game control micro Computer, 70 voice control board, 77 relay board, 80 effect control board, 100 microcomputer for effect control, 101 performance Control CPU, 109 VDP (display control unit) 120 push button, 122 a stick controller, 200 roles thereof.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
First detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
Second detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the different player of the operation of pre-Symbol first detecting means detectable player,
In the first aspect or the second aspect, at least one of the first detection means and the second detection means is an acceleration display for prompting the player of an action detectable by the first detection means, and changing the display mode. Display control means capable of displaying an effective period display for displaying an effective period capable of detecting an operation;
And an effect executing unit capable of executing a predetermined effect when an operation is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit based on execution of the promotion display.
The effect executing means is
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the first aspect, detection of the second detection means with respect to the first aspect is regarded as an effective determination.
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the second aspect, the detection of the second detection means for the second aspect is not regarded as an effective determination.
The display control means
A first promotion display and a second promotion display obtained by enlarging or reducing the first promotion display can be displayed as the promotion display,
A first pattern for variably displaying a first display of a size corresponding to the first promotion display as the first promotion display and performing the second promotion display as the effective period display and the second effective display And a second pattern for variably displaying a second display of a size corresponding to the second promotion display as
By making the change mode of the first display and the second display different, the same effective period is displayed in the first pattern and the second pattern,
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means executes the promotion display such that a proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode. . The promotion display may be in a difficult-to-see state in which at least a portion is hidden by a movable member effect in which the movable member operates.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display period of the promotion display ends later than a period in which the promotion display is in the difficult-to-view state.

Images